Posted at 6:43 AM on December 18, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(1 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
Last week, PoliGraph gave Rep. Torrey Westrom a false rating for his claim that in-home child care providers who are not allowed to vote on whether to unionize will be forced to pay fair-share dues.
That's because Gov. Mark Dayton has been clear on how he wants his executive order allowing child care providers to unionize to be executed: no one would have to join the union if they don't want to, and because day care providers are not considered public employees, they would not have to pay fair share dues.
Westrom's claim was made in a letter to constituents on Dec. 2.
But in a second letter dated Dec. 15, Westrom is revising his claim. Here's what he wrote:
I would like to correct an inadvertent error made in the December 2nd letter regarding how the childcare union election may affect you. The second paragraph of that letter should have stated: "All child care providers may have to live with the decisions of a union, but only the 4,287 providers who receive state subsidies will vote on its formation. The other 7,000 providers may be forced to pay "fair share" union dues, and could be subject to additional regulation, even though they were denied the right to vote in this election.
You can read the rest of the letter here.
Westrom makes reasonable arguments that Dayton's executive order does not guarantee that the unions won't try to collect such dues in the future, or necessarily prevent a court from deciding in the future that such dues could be collected (see the comments section of the previous PoliGraph post).
But despite that uncertainty - and PoliGraph agrees that there are some important unanswered questions about how unionization would play out - right now, we know that those who don't want to be in the union won't have to pay dues because they are not considered public employees.
PoliGraph will be keeping tabs on the issue to see if that changes.
Posted at 2:00 PM on December 16, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(4 Comments)
Filed under: Bachmann fact check, PoliGraph
The fact-checkers were out in full force during Thursday night's Republican presidential debate in Sioux City, Iowa.
It was the last gathering of the candidates before the Iowa caucuses on Jan. 3.
Several fact-checking outlets looked at claims made by Rep. Michele Bachmann on topics ranging from Iran's nuclear capabilities to the number of jobs that would be created during by building an oil pipeline.
So instead of doing our own check today, here's PoliGraph's round up of last night's best reports.
"We have an IAEA report that just recently came out that said literally Iran is within just months of being able to obtain that weapon," said Bachmann.
She is referring to a recent report by the International Atomic Energy Agency regarding Iran's nuclear program.
As FactCheck.org points out, unnamed sources told the Los Angeles Times shortly before the report came out that Iran had the technical ability to design a nuclear weapon within six months if it wanted to.
But FactCheck.org also writes that the actual report isn't so definitive. While the Agency believes that Iran has "serious concern regarding possible military dimensions to Iran's nuclear programme" and that intelligence gathered on the issue is "overall, credible," it stops short of saying that the country is "within months" of having an operative weapon.
The delayed Keystone XL pipeline "would have brought at least 20,000 jobs," Bachmann contended.
Several of the candidates, including Bachmann, criticized President Barack Obama for delaying action on the oil pipeline that would start in Canada and stretch as far as Texas.
Bachmann's jobs estimate is one frequently touted by TransCanada Corporation, the company proposing the project, and other proponents.
But it's on the high-end, because it assumes that only one person holds a pipeline related job for one year, FactCheck.org reports. So, if a pipeline construction job lasts for two years and the same person has the job, the number of jobs created declines.
Meanwhile, the State Department estimates that between 5,000 and 6,000 construction jobs would be created.
"The evidence is that Speaker Gingrich took $1.6 million [from Freddie Mac]. You don't need to be within the technical definition of being a lobbyist to still be influence peddling with senior Republicans in Washington, D.C., to get them to do your bidding," Bachmann said.
CNN previously reported that Newt Gingrich's consulting group had taken between $1.6 million and $1.8 million from Freddie Mac for its services.
But CNN said Bachmann's claim was misleading.
"While Freddie Mac was a Gingrich Group client, Bachmann did not offer hard evidence that Gingrich lobbied for Freddie Mac."
PolitiFact.com came to a similar verdict about Gingrich's history with Freddie Mac, writing that "Gingrich is technically correct that he was not a registered lobbyist for Freddie Mac. But it appears he took pains to avoid being subject to the rules. Giving strategic advice is widely considered a way of using political influence without having to register."
Posted at 2:00 PM on December 14, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(4 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
Two Minnesota unions want to organize Minnesota's in-home child care workers, and the effort has sparked a heated battle between the Dayton administration and Republicans in the Legislature.
Among those who oppose the effort is Rep. Torrey Westrom, R-Elbow Lake, who sent a letter to child care providers encouraging them to reject unionization.
On Dec. 2, he wrote that, while only some day care providers will be able to vote on whether to unionize, "the other 7,000 providers will be forced to pay full or 'fair share' union dues, and will be subject to additional regulation, even though they were denied the right to vote in this election."
Westrom's claim is false.
The Evidence
Two Minnesota unions - American Federation of State County and Municipal Employees and the Service Employees International Union - are trying to unionize the state's in-home day care providers.
On Nov. 15, Gov. Mark Dayton issued an executive order that would allow Minnesota's day care providers who are licensed and registered, and who participate in a state program that subsidizes child care to vote on unionization. That's roughly 4,200 providers out of the approximately 11,000 in the state.
If the majority of those 4,200 agree, it would give the union the right to hash out issues, such as regulation and subsidy rates, with the administration. At this point, a court has put a restraining order on Dayton's executive order but Dayton plans to contest that order.
So, Westrom is correct that only some child care providers will be able to vote on whether there should be a union. But he's wrong that those who don't want to be in the union would have to pay fair share union dues.
A Frequently Asked Questions document on the executive order from Dayton's office is clear on this:
"The Minnesota Fair Share law (Minn. Stat. ยง 179A.06, subd. 3), which requires all public employees to contribute 'a fair share fee for services rendered by the exclusive representative,' would not apply to these family child care providers."
Dayton's executive order makes clear that, "nothing in this order shall be construed to require participation, or the involuntary payment of dues by any family child care provider."
As for additional regulation, Westrom is off the mark there as well. At this point, unionization doesn't come with additional regulations, let alone regulations that all of Minnesota's 11,000 in-home child care workers would be subject to.
Westrom conceded that given the complexity of the issue and the amount of context needed, the sentence may have been better written as: "The other 7,000 providers may be forced to pay full or "fair share" union dues, and will be subject to additional regulation, even though they were denied the right to vote in this election."
The Verdict
Under Gov Dayton's order child care providers who are not allowed to vote on unionization will not have to pay fair share dues.
Westrom's claim is false.
SOURCES
Letter, Rep. Torrey Westrom to constituents, Dec. 2, 2011
Office of Gov. Mark Dayton, Governor Dayton issues executive order calling for union election among child care providers, November 15, 2011
Office of Gov. Mark Dayton, Frequently Asked Questions about Child Care Collective Bargaining, accessed Dec. 13, 2011
Associated Press via Minnesota Public Radio News, Dayton to contest child care unionization ruling, December 8, 2011
Posted at 2:24 PM on December 9, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(8 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
A constitutional amendment to ban same-sex marriage will be on the ballot next fall. Between now and then, voters will be barraged with ads, opinion pieces, and direct mail opposing and favoring the effort.
Rep. Steve Drazkowski, R-Mazeppa, fired an early shot in the Red Wing Republican Eagle. Those who argue that banning same-sex marriage will be bad for the economy are wrong, he wrote in a November 21, 2011, opinion piece.
"To the contrary, the facts show that states with a marriage protection amendment are our top performing economic states," he wrote. "For example, eight of the top 10 'best states for business' according to a survey of 556 CEO's by Chief Executive Magazine have a state marriage amendment in their constitution. "
Drazkowski's claim is misleading.
The Evidence
Chief Executive Magazine surveyed 556 chief executive officers who rank the best states for business.
It's true that eight out of the top 10 states listed in the survey have constitutional amendments that ban same-sex marriage.
But Chief Executive Magazine Editor JP Donlon said that Drazkowski is wrong to link a ban on same-sex marriage to economic performance.
"We neither looked or thought about such a correlation because it doesn't have a bearing on a state's performance one way or another," Donlon said.
Rather, the survey asked the CEOs questions about taxes and regulatory issues, quality of workers and living environment in each state.
It's also useful to look at other rankings. For example, Forbes Magazine released its list in November, and it includes Iowa, where same-sex marriage is allowed. A recent study conducted by the Williams Institute found that legal same-sex marriage boosted the wedding and tourism industries in Iowa by upwards of $13 million.
That's not to say that families aren't important to the economy, said Skip Burzumato, assistant director of The National Marriage Project at the University of Virginia. Drazkowski also cites one of the Marriage Project's recent papers in his op-ed.
The project has found that "when children are raised in intact, married families, they cost the state less," Burzumato said. "They require special education at a lower rate and they encounter the criminal justice system at a lower rate."
But the group hasn't looked at how same-sex families affect the economy.
Mark Regnerus, a professor at the University of Texas at Austin has just started looking at how children of same-sex parents fare. He said it's too soon to tell whether their employment futures, for instance, are any better or worse than those who grow up with opposite-sex parents.
"In general, stable parental marriage is good for subsequent personal employment of the children [as adults]," he said. "If gay marriage fostered the same stable traits that now occur in married, mom/dad families, then it would foster greater employment. It is, of course, too soon to say whether gay marriages will closely mimic straight ones. Maybe; maybe not."
The Verdict
Drazkowski's claim is misleading. While eight of Chief Executive Magazine's top 10 states best for business have constitutional amendments that ban same-sex marriage, there's no correlation between the bans and the business ranking.
SOURCES
The Red Wing Republican Eagle, Column: Citizens should favor marriage amendment, by Rep. Steve Drazkowski, Nov. 21, 2011 (subscription only)
Chief Executive, Best/Worst States for Business, by JP Donlon, May 3, 2011
Texas Constitution, Article 1, Section 32, accessed Dec. 9, 2011
Florida Constitution, Article 1, Section 27, accessed Dec. 9, 2011
Georgia Constitution, Article 1, Section IV, accessed Dec. 9, 2011
Virginia Constitution, Article 1, Section 15-A, accessed Dec. 9, 2011
South Carolina Constitution, Article XVII, Section 15, Dec. 9, 2011
Utah Constitution, Article 1, Section 29, Dec. 9, 2011
Nevada Constitution, Article 1, Section 21, Dec. 9, 2011
The Sustainable Demographic Dividend: What do Marriage and Fertility Have to Do With the Economy, accessed Dec. 9, 2011
ABC News, Gay Marriage Has Boosted Iowa's Economy, Study Concludes, by Elizabeth Hartfield, Dec. 8, 2011
The Williams Institute, Estimating the Economic Boost of Marriage Equality in Iowa: Sales Tax, December 2011
Interview, JP Donlon, editor, Chief Executive Magainze, Dec. 8, 2011
Interview, Skip Burzumato, Assistant Director, The National Marriage Project, Dec. 9, 2011
E-mail exchange, Mark Regnerus, associate professor, University of Texas at Austin, Dec. 9, 2011
E-mail exchange, Jason Wenisch, spokesman, Rep. Steve Drazkowski, Dec. 9, 2011
Posted at 2:06 PM on December 7, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(1 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
After last summer's budget breakdown, the state got some good financial news: it will have an $876 million budget surplus going into the coming legislative session.
But that bright spot was quickly overshadowed by the fact that the state is still projected to have a $1.3 billion deficit in the coming fiscal year - and that doesn't include the money the state borrowed from schools to help close the current budget cycle's deficit, some lawmakers point out.
Among them is Sen. Richard Cohen, DFL-St. Paul, who issued this reminder during a press conference after Minnesota Management and Budget released the latest forecast.
"We've used school shifts over the years. This isn't the first time," he said. "But there's always been some ability to see ahead to pay back that school shift... This is the first time we've had a shift that goes on forever."
Cohen appears to be correct that the governor and lawmakers have entered uncharted territory when it comes to using this budget fix.
The Evidence
Many times, the state has given schools only part of their annual aid one year and the rest the following year; it's a trick that allows the Legislature and governor to borrow money from schools in the short term to balance the general fund books, without actually cutting the amount schools are owed.
The proportions have changed depending on the state's budget outlook, but, at best, schools get 90 percent of their aid in one fiscal year, and the remaining 10 percent the following.
To solve Minnesota's most recent debt problems, schools are now getting 60 percent of their aid in one year and the remainder in the next. It's not technically a cut, but the latest change has created cash flow issues for some schools who've had to take out loans or use reserves to make ends meet between checks.
If the state decided today to revert to its old formula, it would cost $2.1 billion (that's not including a separate school-related budget trick that saved the state $600 million.) That figure is not included in the coming two-year budget cycle's $1.3 billion projected deficit.
To assess Cohen's claim, PoliGraph put itself in the shoes of a Minnesotan who might not know much about education funding. From that perspective, Cohen's claim is confusing because he makes it sounds as if latest shift is unprecedented because there's no plan to pay it off.
But back in 1983, schools started receiving only 85 percent of their payment one year, and the remaining 15 percent the next - and that went on for 15 years without an end in sight.
It's also worth noting that the law requires the state to give schools extra cash when it has it; surpluses, such as the one Minnesota has now, must first be used to beef up the state's cash flow and budget reserve accounts, and leftovers must be given to schools to make up for the shift. (There's not enough of a surplus to do that this time around, though.)
So, while we don't know when the current round of schools borrowing will end, there is a mechanism in state law that requires schools are paid back.
Cohen said he was trying to underscore how enormous this particular shift is compared to others.
"No one has a realistic idea of how to pay back $2.1 billion," he said.
Cohen has a point: according to historical data provided by the Minnesota Legislature's House Research staff, schools are getting paid a much smaller portion of their aid each year than they have in the past.
And so far, it's the most expensive shift. For instance, in 1997, when lawmakers ended that 15-year-long payment shift, it only cost the state $156 million
The Verdict
Cohen is right that the state has borrowed money from schools in the past to make ends meet, including one stretch that lasted 15 years with no specified end date.
But this fix is different even from that one. Never before has the state delayed such a large percentage of school payments. And while technically the governor and Legislature created a mechanism to correct the shift, it is hard to see how that will happen, given how expensive it would be to pay off today.
This claim earns an accurate on the PoliGraph test.
SOURCES
Minnesota Management and Budget, November Forecast, accessed Dec. 6, 2011
Minnesota Public Radio News, Budget surplus gives state officials wiggle room in legislative session, by Tom Scheck, Dec. 2, 2011
Minnesota Statute 16A.152, accessed Dec. 6, 2011
Minnesota Public Radio News, Video: Budget deal explained, by Molly Bloom and Curtis Gilbert, July 15, 2011
Minnesota Legislature House Fiscal Analysis, State Education Funding Accounting Shifts, January 2011
Interview and e-mail exchange, Greg Crowe, House Research analysis, Dec. 6, 2011
Interview, Rep. Mindy Greiling, Dec. 6, 2011
Interview, Sen. Richard Cohen, Dec. 6, 2011
Posted at 2:30 PM on December 2, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(3 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
To make their case against unionization of Minnesota's in-home child care providers, a coalition of groups has produced a new web ad that tells a cautionary tale about a similar situation in Michigan.
"In Michigan, unions have gone so far as to skim millions from Medicaid that would otherwise have gone to help disabled children," an ad by Childcare Freedom warns.
Childcare Freedom is right that some Medicaid money is going to union dues in Michigan. But its claim that the money would have gone to children is misleading.
The Evidence
Gov. Mark Dayton has ordered about 4,200 in-home child care providers who participate in a state-subsidized program to vote on unionization. It's still unclear how unionization would affect the roughly 7,000 providers who don't get to vote.
The vote, which will begin next week, has prompted a lawsuit by a group of providers who oppose the effort. They're backed by Childcare Freedom, a coalition of conservative groups including Minnesota Family Council, Minnesota Free Market Institute and Minnesota Majority.
Childcare Freedom's ad features a Mafioso smoking a cigar - the background music would remind you of the soundtrack to The Godfather - and demanding a union vote. The claim in question is voiced-over a picture of a disabled child in a wheelchair; the statement refers to a similar effort in Michigan to unionize roughly 42,000 in-home care providers who take care of the elderly or people over 18 with developmental disabilities.
Members of the Michigan union, which were organized in 2005, consist mostly of people who are taking care of their adult children, elderly parents or other family members, as well as providers who work for themselves, says Susan Steinke, executive director of the Michigan Quality Community Care Council. Created in 2004 by the state, MQCCC effectively serves as the workers' employer.
Many workers are forgoing regular jobs to take care of family members, relying on Medicaid checks to cover bills instead, she said.
Because the Michigan workers collect Medicaid to cover the cost of care, they are considered employees of the state. That means 2.75 percent is taken out of every check to cover union dues. Since 2007, an average of $5.6 million has been collected annually in union dues, according to the Department of Community Health.
So, Childcare Freedom is correct that SEIU has collected millions from Medicaid checks.
The ad's underlying implication is that unions are strong-arming workers into unionization in other states, and it's a reasonable matter of debate among home-care providers in Michigan.
Some say they didn't know there was a vote. They don't want to be members because they are taking care of their own family members, and aren't getting union benefits such as more vacation time. (Members can opt out, but still must pay a fair-share fee.)
Mackinac Center Legal Foundation director Patrick J. Wright, who opposes unionization, says that only a fraction of the home care workers voted, and that the community care council was formed under union pressure; SEIU wanted an employer to organize against, so the state created one, he said. This fiscal year, the Michigan Legislature defunded the council, though the group is still functioning on a limited budget and union dues are still being collected.
On the other side, Steinke points out that the council offers workers training opportunities that would otherwise be unavailable, and that union members are paid more after SEIU's intervention.
"If you were making $5.15 an hour and now you're making $8 an hour, you're still only paying 2.75 percent in dues," Steinke said. "That's 22 cents to make $2.85 more."
The Verdict
Taken as a whole, this ad implies that unions are forcing workers in many sectors into collective bargaining. In Michigan's case, that's a matter of debate.
Childcare Freedom is correct that SEIU has collected millions in union dues from Medicaid checks over the last few years.
But to say that it has been "skimmed" implies the money was obtained illegally, which is false. And it's wrong to say that the union dues would otherwise go to children because the program in question is for adults.
It's a close call, but PoliGraph rates this claim misleading.
SOURCES
Childcare Freedom, Union Shakedown Childcare Providers, accessed Dec. 1, 2011
WJBK Fox 2, Forced To Join a Union: SEIU Getting Money From Michigan Medicaid Checks, Nov. 15, 2011
Minnesota Public Radio, Conservative-backed group sues over child care union vote, by Tim Pugmire, November 28, 2011
Interview, Patrick Wright, director, Mackinac Center Legal Foundation, Dec. 1, 2011
Interview, Steinke, executive director of the Michigan Quality Community Care Council, Dec. 2, 2011
Posted at 2:19 PM on November 30, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(3 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
Republicans and Democrats can agree on one thing: Both sides say former Massachusetts Gov. Mitt Romney has changed his views on a range of issues to make good with conservative voters.
The latest attack comes from Democratic National Committee, which launched a new website this week highlighting Romney's flip-flops.
DFL Party Chairman Ken Martin headlined a press conference to introduce Minnesotans to the site, saying, "Romney once supported Ted Kennedy and John McCain's immigration reform bill, but last week he said he's willing to kick out of America families who have lived in the United States for over a generation."
Martin's statement uses hyperbole to score a point against a Republican presidential hopeful, but it's true that Mitt Romney has shifted the way he talks about immigration.
The Evidence
In 2005, Republican Sen. John McCain, and Democratic Sen. Edward Kennedy were leading an effort to overhaul federal immigration rules. Among other things, their proposal would have created a path to citizenship for immigrants not legally in the United States, as long as they worked, declined public benefits and paid fines and back taxes.
According to a March 2007 Boston Globe story, Romney said in 2005 that the McCain-Kennedy plan and others were "reasonable proposals" because they didn't simply hand out citizenship to illegal immigrants - a process known as amnesty often criticized by some on the right.
"[The bill is] saying you could work your way into becoming a legal resident of the country by working here without taking benefits and then applying and then paying a fine," Romney told the Globe in 2005.
The Globe reported that Romney stopped short of endorsing the McCain-Kennedy bill, as Martin's claim implies. But he signaled that he generally supported a plan that would allow some illegal immigrants to stay in the country.
In March 2006, Romney told The Lowell Sun that while he didn't believe in amnesty, he also didn't believe "in rounding up 11 million people and forcing them at gunpoint from our country."
"Let's have them registered, know who they are," Romney said. "Those who have been arrested or convicted of crimes shouldn't be here. Those that are here paying taxes and not taking government benefits should begin a process towards application for citizenship, as they would from their home country."
Romney made similar comments to Bloomberg News in 2006, and again suggested that some illegal immigrants should be allowed to stay in the United States.
"We need to begin a process of registering those people, some being returned, and some beginning the process of applying for citizenship and establishing legal status," Romney said according to a recent Bloomberg story on his immigration record.
But by 2007, as he launched his first bid for the White House, Romney's tone had changed.
Westy Egmont, who co-chaired an immigration advisory committee during Romney's tenure, says the shift was driven by McCain's presence in the race.
"Romney went from trying to figure out a position where he could turn off the magnets and yet appear to offer an understanding that people needed to get themselves right in status," Egmont said. "With that not working, and with McCain being competitive for the presidency, I saw him taking a position challenging McCain for amnesty. He became hardline with respect to McCain."
Romney's comments at a 2007 event in Arizona with Sheriff Joe Arpaio, whose aggressive views on illegal immigrants make him a controversial figure, underscore Egmont's observations.
"My view is there should be no advantage for those that are here illegally in pursuing a course of permanent residency," Romney said. He said that legislation that would allow some illegal immigrants a path to citizenship "could result in virtual amnesty," according to the Globe.
When pressed on his 2006 comments to the Lowell Sun on a 2007 episode of Meet the Press, Romney said what he meant was that illegal immigrants should "have a set period during which... they sign up for application for permanent residency or for citizenship. But there's a set period where upon they should return home... For the great majority, they'll be going home."
Romney's 2007 comments were reflected in the Nov. 11, 2011, Republican debate Martin references.
At the event, GOP contender Newt Gingrich said that illegal immigrants who have been here for "25 years and you got three kids and two grandkids, you've been paying taxes and obeying the law, you belong to a local church, I don't think we're going to separate you from your family, uproot you forcefully and kick you out."
When CNN host Wolf Blitzer asked Romney if he thought that Gingrich's approach amounted to amnesty, and entice others to come to the United States illegally, Romney's response was unequivocal.
"There's no question," Romney said. "To say that we're going to say to the people who have come here illegally that now you're all going to get to stay or some large number are going to get to stay and become permanent residents of the United States, that will only encourage more people to do the same thing."
But when pressed by Blitzer to say whether he would let some long-time illegal immigrants stay, Romney dodged the question.
"I'm not going to start drawing lines here about who gets to stay and who get to go," Romney said. "The principle is that we are not going to have an amnesty system that says that people who come here illegally get to stay for the rest of their life in this country legally."
The Verdict
Romney's flip-flop on immigration reform is not as dramatic or clear-cut as Martin makes it out to be; Romney always talked around the edges of the issue, and never officially endorsed any specific immigration proposal.
But it's true that Romney's tone on immigration has changed in recent years, especially as he has run for president.
So, while Martin is guilty of hyperbole, it would be misleading to say that Romney hasn't changed his views on immigration.
It was a tough call, but because Romney initially called the McCain-Kennedy approach reasonable and now says he will not support a system that allows illegal immigrants to stay, PoliGraph says that Martin's statement leans toward accurate.
SOURCES
Thomas, Summary of H.R. 2330: Secure America and Orderly Immigration Act, accessed Nov. 29, 2011
The Boston Globe, Romney's words grow hard on immigration, by Scott Helman, March 16, 2007 (subscription only)
The Boston Globe, Romney's shifting stance on immigration, by Matt Viser, Nov. 29, 2011 (subscription only)
The Lowell Sun, Romney supports immigration program, but not granting 'amnesty', March 30, 2006 (subscription only)
Bloomberg News, Romney in 2006 Backed Immigration Stance He Now Deems 'Amnesty', by Julie Hirschfield Davis, Nov. 27, 2011
Meet the Press, transcript, Dec. 16, 2007, accessed Nov. 29, 2011
Time Magazine, Transcript of Nov. 22 CNN GOP debate, accessed Nov. 29, 2011
E-mail exchange, Carlie Waibel, DFL spokeswoman
E-mail exchange, Andrea Saul, spokeswoman, Romney for President
Posted at 2:00 PM on November 16, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(1 Comments)
Filed under: Bachmann fact check, PoliGraph
While U.S. Rep. Michele Bachmann touts her consistent positions on an array of issues dear to conservatives, in a new ad the Republican presidential hopeful says that her GOP opponents have records filled with surprises.
They've flip-flopped on abortion, immigration, health care and gay marriage, among other things, Bachmann says.
The new talking point represents a subtle shift in Bachmann's tactics in the lead-up to the all-important Iowa caucuses. Rather than contrast her record against that of President Barack Obama, who has largely been the target of her criticism up until now, Bachmann is highlighting her record against those of her GOP opponents.
During a Nov. 13, 2011, Meet the Press interview, Bachmann singled out former Massachusetts Gov. Mitt Romney.
"There's certainly a sharp contrast between myself and Gov. Romney," she said. "He has been pro-choice, I am pro-life. He has been for marriage between people of the same sex. I am for marriage between one man and one woman."
Romney has flip-flopped on abortion, but not on same-sex marriage.
The Evidence
Unlike Bachmann, who has always opposed abortion, Romney's stance on the issue has turned 180 degrees since he took the national stage.
In 1994, while challenging Democrat Ted Kennedy for his Senate seat, Romney said that he was personally opposed to abortion, but that he would not force his belief on others.
"I believe that abortion should be safe and legal in this country," he said during the debate. "I believe that since Roe vs. Wade has been the law for 20 years, that we should sustain and support that law and the right of a woman to make that choice."
In 2002, while running for governor of Massachusetts, Romney said he would "preserve and protect a woman's right to choose, and am devoted and dedicated to honoring my word in that regard."
In the intervening years, as Romney aimed for the White House, he changed his tune.
Recently, he wrote in the National Review that he is "pro-life and believe[s] that abortion should be limited to only instances of rape, incest, or to save the life of the mother." He also wrote that he would support the reversal of Roe vs. Wade, a departure from his 1994 comments, among other proposals that would limit abortion.
While Bachmann has always opposed gay marriage, Romney's shifting positions on gay rights are far more nuanced. While running for Senate, Romney won the support of the Republican Log Cabin Club of Massachusetts by promising to support efforts that would end discrimination against gays and lesbians. "We must make equality for gays and lesbians a mainstream concern," Romney wrote in a 1994 letter to the group. "My opponent cannot do this," he said of Kennedy. "I can and will."
During his run for governor, Romney also said that he would support giving same-sex couples benefits such as hospital visitation rights and inheritance rights. That same year, after Romney's wife, son and daughter-in-law signed a petition to put a gay marriage constitutional amendment on the ballot, his spokesperson told the Bay Window newspaper that Romney "is opposed to gay marriage, but in the case of the 'defense of marriage' amendment Mitt believes it goes too far in that it would outlaw domestic partnership for non-traditional couples."
In October of that year, Romney drove that message home. "Call me old fashioned," he said, "but I don't support gay marriage, nor do I support civil union if it is the exact embodiment of marriage."
One New York Times article reported that Romney told the Log Cabin Club in 2002 that he opposed gay marriage, but he wouldn't fight the state's Supreme Court if it ultimately ruled gay marriage to be legal.
But that's exactly what Romney did in 2003 when same-sex marriage was made legal. Romney said he disagreed with the ruling because marriage should be between a man and woman.
"I will support an amendment to the Massachusetts Constitution that makes that expressly clear," he said, according to a Nov. 20, 2003 New York Times article. "Of course, we must provide basic civil rights and appropriate benefits to nontraditional couples, but marriage is a special institution that should be reserved for a man and a woman."
In subsequent months, the Boston Globe reported that Romney asked lawmakers to vote for such a ban, but not one that would prevent civil unions.
Today, Romney's rhetoric on the subject isn't much different, though it is more direct, and, say some of his critics, more severe. Romney has signed a pledge to support a federal ban of gay marriage, among other things. But he's also said that he still supports giving same-sex couples some benefits, such as hospital visitation rights.
The Verdict
Bachmann's clearly correct that Romney flip-flopped on abortion.
And it would be fair to say that Romney's record on gay rights has been a bit muddy; at times he's appeared to court gay supporters, and at others, he's appeared to reject gay rights.
But he's always said that he opposes same-sex marriage, so the second part of Bachmann's claim is incorrect.
SOURCES
Meet the Press, Nov. 13, 2011 episode
Footage from the 1994 Kennedy/Romney debate, accessed Nov. 15, 2011
Footage from 2002 Massachusetts Gubernatorial debate, accessed Nov. 15, 2011
The Boston Globe, Why I vetoed contraception bill, By Mitt Romney, July 26, 2005
The National Review, My Pro-Life Pledge, by Mitt Romney, June 18, 2011
The New York Times, Romney's Tone on Gay Rights Is Seen as Shift, by Michael Luo, Sept. 8, 2007 MICHAEL LUO
1994 letter from Romney to Log Cabin Club of Massachusetts, accessed Nov. 16, 2011
The New York Times, Romney's Gay Rights Stance Draws Ire, by Adam Nagourney and David D. Kirkpatrick, Dec. 9, 2006
CNN, Interview with Mitt Romney regarding gay adoption, accessed Nov. 16, 2011
The Bay Window, Gay GOP touts Romney as good for the community, March 28, 2002
The New York Times, Marriage by Gays Gains Big Victory in Massachusetts, by Pam Belluck, November 20, 2003
The New York Times, Obey Same-Sex Marriage Law, Officials Told, by Katie Zezima, April 26, 2004
C-SPAN, Massachusetts Gubernatorial Debate, Oct. 1, 2002
The Huffington Post, Mitt Romney Supports 'Partnership Agreements,' Not Marriage, For Gay Couples, by Sam Stein, Oct. 11, 2011
CBS News, Mitt Romney pledges opposition to gay marriage, By Brian Montopoli, Aug. 4, 2011
Posted at 2:30 PM on November 11, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(3 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
While the Occupy Wall Street protests continue across the nation, Democratic U.S. Rep. Keith Ellison believes that people are still confused about the movement's message. To clarify, Ellison created a brief video to explain what Occupy Wall Street is all about - and that income inequality is among the group's top frustrations.
"For the last 30 years, the average working American has seen their pay stay flat," Ellison says in the video as a graph appears beside him. "During the same period, the top one percent have seen their income grow."
It's true that the rich have gotten richer by leaps and bounds in the last 30 years and that everyone else has struggled to increase their earnings. But to say that the average American's pay has been stagnant is incorrect.
The Evidence
The graph that appears in Ellison's video is from an article in the publication Mother Jones, said Ellison's spokesman. Using inflation-adjusted data from the period between 1978 and 2008, it shows that the bottom 90 percent's income has been stagnant over the last 30 years - averaging about $31,000 - and that the top 1 percent's income has risen dramatically.
But lumping together income for everyone in the bottom 90 percent disguises the fact that lots of people saw income increases in the last 30 years; the data for the 90 percent used by Mother Jones cannot be parsed more narrowly, so the income gap appears more dramatic as a result.
A recent report from the non-partisan Congressional Budget Office, illustrates income inequality more clearly.
- For those in the 81st through 99th percentiles, after-tax, inflation-adjusted average income grew by 65 percent between 1979 and 2007.
- Those in the 21st through the 80th percentiles - the middle of the income scale - saw their average income grow by nearly 40 percent during the same period of time.
- And for everyone in the lowest income percentile, average income grew by 18 percent.
Certainly, those are small gains when compared to the top 1 percent, who saw their income increase by 275 percent between 1979 and 2007, according to the CBO report. And it's clear that income has grown far slower for those in the lower and middle classes than it has for top earners.
To that end, Ellison's underlying point that the income gap is expanding is undeniable, said Chad Stone who is chief economist for the Center on Budget and Policy Priorities.
"The one thing that stands out almost no matter how you do it is that huge gains have accrued to the top one percent of households, while growth, to the extent that there has been growth farther down the income distribution has been much slower," Stone said. "There's an unmistakable widening of inequality."
The Verdict
Ellison is clearly correct that the rich have gotten much, much richer in the last 30 years. And his underlying point that the income gap has grown substantially is spot-on.
But a CBO report shows that the first part of his claim, that the average worker's pay has remained stagnant for three decades, is incorrect.
So, for getting the first part of his statement wrong, and the second part right, PoliGraph is issuing a rarely-used "True/False" ruling for this claim.
SOURCES
YouTube, DFL Rep. Keith Ellison on the Occupy Wall Street movement, Nov. 2, 2011
Mother Jones, Charts: Who Are the 1 Percent?, by Dave Gilson, Oct. 10, 2011
The World Top Incomes Database, accessed Nov. 10, 2011
The Economist, The 99 percent, Oct 26th 2011
The Congressional Budget Office, Trends in the Distribution of Household Income Between 1979 and 2007, Oct. 2011
The Center on Budget and Policy Priorities, Income Gaps Between Very Rich and Everyone Else More Than Tripled In Last Three Decades, New Data Show, by Arloc Sherman and Chad Stone, June 25, 2010
Interview, Chad Stone, Chief Economist at the Center on Budget and Policy Priorities, Nov. 11, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on November 4, 2011
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: PoliGraph
With jobs and the economy emerging as the defining issue of the 2012 presidential campaign, President Barack Obama is trying to make clear the nation is much better off than it was before he took office in 2009 - but that there's still a long way to go.
To highlight the nation's economic progress, and to sell his new jobs plan that he says will make the economy even better, Obama invited nine local television stations from across the country to the White House. WCCO-TV was among them.
During his brief chat with anchor Amelia Santaniello, Obama made two claims about the economy's performance during his time in office.
PoliGraph checked both of them and found that Obama's statements are basically correct.
"In the private sector, we've seen over 2 million jobs created. This year alone, over a million jobs created."
Obama's benchmark is February 2010, the nadir of employment when the nation had 106.7 million private sector jobs, according to seasonally adjusted employment figures from the Bureau of Labor Statistics.
Currently, we have more than 109.5 million private sector jobs - a difference of nearly 2.8 million.
Obama's also correct that more than 1 million jobs have been added since the beginning of 2011.
Obama got his facts straight on this one, and for that, his claim is accurate.
Next, a look at Obama's claim that the economy has grown during his tenure.
Here's what he said:
"The thing I'm proudest of is having stabilized the economy, even though it's not where it needs to be. Keep in mind that when I came in office, the economy had contracted by 9 percent, which is the most since the Great Depression. By 2010, the economy had grown by 4 percent, so that was a huge reversal."
Right before Obama was sworn into office in 2009, the recession had already taken a toll on the economy. Case in point: gross domestic product had fallen by 8.9 percent in the last quarter of 2008, according to the U.S. Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) - roughly the 9 percent Obama mentioned in his interview.
Obama is also correct that, in the first quarter of 2010, GDP had grown 3.9 percent over the last quarter of 2009.
As for the recession's historical significance, Obama's in the ballpark. PoliGraph found two instances since the Great Depression of steeper annual or quarterly GDP declines than the one in the last quarter of 2008.
But the BEA told us that the most recent recession, from start to finish, represents the most dramatic economic contraction since the government started collecting quarterly GDP data in 1947. (Before that, the government only collected annual data, which makes it difficult to measure the significance of older recessions compared to the most recent one.)
It's also important to point out that, while the economy continues to grow, its expansion has slowed some since the start of 2010. BEA attributes the deceleration to a variety of factors, including fluctuating consumer spending, struggling exports and increasing imports, and periodic dips in government spending.
All in all, Obama gets this claim correct as well.
SOURCES
WCCO-TV, Amelia Santaniello interviews President Barack Obama, Nov. 1, 2011
CNN, Recession officially ended in June 2009, By Chris Isidore, Sept. 20, 2010
National Bureau of Economic Research, US Business Cycle Expansions and Contractions, accessed Nov. 3, 2011
The Bureau of Labor Statistics, Current Employment Statistics - CES (National), accessed Nov. 3, 2011
Bureau of Economic Analysis, Table 1.1.1. Percent Change From Preceding Period in Real Gross Domestic Product (A) (Q), accessed Nov. 3, 2011
E-mail exchange, Caroline Hughes, spokeswoman, The White House, Nov. 3, 2011
E-mail exchange, Thomas Dail, spokesman, Bureau of Economic Analysis, Nov. 3, 2011
Interview, Steve Hine, Minnesota Department of Employment and Economic Development, Nov. 3, 2011
Posted at 3:01 PM on October 28, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
Republican legislators say their big goal for the coming legislative session is to grow jobs by reducing taxes and rolling back regulations, among other things.
To underscore the need for the state Senate Republican's plan to grow jobs, Deputy Senate Majority Leader Geoff Michel pointed out that the number of private sector jobs in Minnesota has fallen to 1998 levels.
"We have the same number of jobs in 2011 as we did in 1998," Michel said in an Oct. 24, 2011, press conference to announce his caucus's plan. "Since the recession hit in 2007, 2008, we have fallen back to 1998 private sector job levels."
Though Minnesota's employment took a hit with the recession, the state still has more jobs now than it did in 1998.
The Evidence
The average number of private sector jobs for the first three quarters of 2011 is about 2.242 million, according to data from the Minnesota Department of Employment and Economic Development. That's using non-seasonally adjusted employment counts.
That's about 78,000 more jobs than the average of 2.164 million in the first three quarters of 1998. To put that figure in perspective, 78,000 jobs is roughly the same number of jobs 3M has worldwide.
Even looked at another way - a month-to-month comparison -- Minnesota has more jobs now than it did in 1998. A comparison of jobs figures that are seasonally adjusted yields the same result.
Chris Van Guilder, a spokesman for Michel, pushed back. He said that in the context of the millions of jobs the state supports, the difference of 78,000 jobs over more than a decade isn't significant enough to label his boss' statement false.
UPDATE: On Saturday, Oct. 29, Sen. Michel sent PoliGraph this graph as additional sourcing for his claim. The visual still shows that Minnesota has more jobs now than it did in 1998, but Michel said he relied on the graph because it makes his broader point that the state lost a significant number of jobs in recent years. The graph shows a sharp decline in jobs around the time of the recession; according to DEED's numbers, Minnesota has roughly the same number of jobs now as it did between 2003 and 2004.
The Verdict
Though Minnesota lost a lot of jobs as a result of the recession, Michel is incorrect that Minnesota has the same level of private sector employment now as it did in 1998.
PoliGraph rates this claim false.
SOURCES
Minnesota State Senate, clips from Oct. 24, 2011, press conference, accessed Oct. 28, 2011
Minnesota State Senate Republican Caucus, Senate Republican Caucus Announces Jobs Agenda for 2012 Legislative Session, Oct. 24, 2011
Minnesota Department of Employment and Economic Development, Total Minnesota private sector employment 1990-2011, accessed Oct. 28, 2011
Minnesota Department of Employment and Economic Development, Total Minnesota employment, seasonally adjusted 1990-2011, accessed Oct. 28, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on October 26, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
After a drawn-out debate over the budget, lawmakers have turned their attention to another delayed decision: whether to green-light a new stadium for the Minnesota Vikings.
Sen. John Marty, DFL-Roseville, is ranking member of the state Senate's tax committee, and he opposes the effort because it is too expensive for taxpayers.
"Zygi Wilf and the Vikings are attempting to make their Ramsey County stadium deal sound like a run-of-the-mill, routine proposal. It is not," Marty wrote in an Oct. 23 opinion piece in the Twin Cities Daily Planet. "The Vikings are asking for the #1, all-time, biggest taxpayer subsidy of any sports franchise anywhere in American history!"
Marty wrote a commentary on the subject for Minnesota Public Radio News Oct. 21.
For the first time, PoliGraph tackles sports, and finds Marty's claim mostly accurate.
The Evidence
The proposed Arden Hills Vikings stadium is expected to exceed $1 billion. The current plan would require the state to chip in $300 million, Ramsey County to pay for $350 million of the project's cost by raising the sales tax, and the Vikings to contribute $407 million.
That doesn't include losses in tax revenue that Marty argues would effectively increase the public's contribution further, nor does it factor in a Metropolitan Council report that predicts the project will exceed cost projections.
To support his claim, Marty relied on research conducted earlier this year by two economists associated with the College of the Holy Cross in Massachusetts. The report looked back at the costs of all sports arenas in the United States going back as far as 1990.
The most expensive buildings on the list include the Indianapolis Colts stadium, which cost taxpayers roughly $620 million (the Holy Cross report incorrectly states the cost as $720 million), the Washington Nationals field, which cost the public $611 million, and the Orlando Magic arena, which cost the public $430 million.
PoliGraph looked back even further using research by the National Sports Law Institute at Marquette University, and found only one facility more costly to the public than the Vikings stadium is expected to be: Madison Square Garden in New York City.
The Garden's most recent construction occurred in 1968 and cost $123 million in taxpayer dollars. Accounting for inflation, the stadium would have cost roughly $762 million today.
The Verdict
Madison Square Garden beats the Vikings' proposal when adjusted for inflation, but the building is more than 40 years old. When it comes to stadiums built in the last 20 years, the planned Vikings stadium comes out on top.
For getting his facts nearly correct, Marty's claim leans toward accurate.
SOURCES
The Twin Cities Daily Planet, Let's inject fiscal sanity into stadium debate, by John Marty, Oct. 23, 2011
The Minnesota Vikings, the New Minnesota Stadium: FAQ, accessed Oct. 24, 2011
National Public Radio, The Nation: Stop The Subsidy-Sucking Sports Stadiums, by Neil Demause, August 5, 2011
Metropolitan Council, Stadium Proposal Risk Analysis, Oct. 2011
Financing Professional Sports Facilities, By Robert A. Baade and Victor A. Matheson, January 2011
Marquette University Law School, National Sports Law Institute, Sports Facility Reports Volume 12, Summer 2011
Interview, Heidi Mallin, spokeswoman, Lucas Oil Field
Email exchange, Victor Matheson, economist, College of the Holy Cross, Oct. 26, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on October 21, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(6 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
As a special panel created by Gov. Mark Dayton convened this week to make recommendations on the state's election rules, a group that supports a voter identification law is touting a new report about voter fraud convictions associated with the 2008 election.
"As of August 10th, 2011, 113 individuals are now known to have been convicted for voter fraud committed in 2008," the report from Minnesota Majority, a right-leaning group, states.
Minnesota Majority may be in range, but it is difficult to pin down a precise number.
The Evidence
Minnesota Majority's report largely focuses on felons who were ineligible to vote in the 2008 election, but did anyway. The group argues that the number may be much higher than that, but many who violate election rules avoid punishment if they can prove they did not know they were ineligible to cast a ballot.
The number of convictions represents weaknesses in the state's same-day registration policy, the group contends.
In Hennepin County, 23 people have been convicted of voter fraud and eight cases are pending. In Ramsey County, 36 convictions have resulted from the 2008 elections as of last spring, including cases involving ineligible voters who registered, but who did not end up voting.
PoliGraph also requested voter fraud conviction data for every county in the state. The data, collected by the Minnesota Supreme Court, shows that 144 people have been convicted of voter fraud since 2009.
The Supreme Court numbers are not a perfect comparison to the Minnesota Majority's report because the data include some cases associated with the 2010 election, and are not limited to cases involving felons who voted illegally.
Ramsey County Elections Manager Joe Mansky, who sits on the governor's special committee and is widely considered to be a state expert on voting, said that the vast majority of such cases involve people who have been convicted of a felony, are ineligible to vote, but do anyway.
But these are isolated cases that could not be solved by implementing a voter identification law, he said. And unlike other states, there's no evidence that Minnesota has had large, organized attempts to violate the law, Mansky said.
"This is just individuals acting on their own, with imperfect information, no information," he said.
Furthermore, those who were found to violate the law represent far less than 1 percent of the roughly 2.9 million Minnesotans who voted in the 2008 election.
The Verdict
Based on independent information, it appears that Minnesota Majority's estimate that 113 people have been convicted of voter fraud may be in the ballpark, though a precise number is elusive.
As a result, their claim rates inconclusive.
SOURCES
Minnesota Majority, Felon Voter Fraud Convictions Stemming from Minnesota's 2008 General Election, October 13, 2011
Citizens for Election Integrity Minnesota, Facts About Ineligible Voting and Voter Fraud in Minnesota: Based on data from Minnesota County Attorneys, November 2010
In 5-Year Effort, Scant Evidence of Voter Fraud, By Eric Lipton and Ian Urbina, April 12, 2007
Voter fraud conviction data, Minnesota Supreme Court, Oct. 20, 2011
Voter fraud conviction data, Hennepin County, Oct. 20, 2011
Interview, Dan McGrath, Minnesota Majority, Oct. 20, 2011
Interview, Joe Mansky, Ramsey County Elections Manager, Oct. 21, 2011
Interview, John Kingrey, Executive Director, Minnesota County Attorneys Association, Oct. 20, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on October 14, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
Cities and towns across the state are weighing whether to increase their property tax levies. Complicating the question is a new program included in the latest budget meant to reduce the property tax burden for some homeowners.
House Minority Leader Rep. Paul Thissen says the state's new approach to property taxes won't provide relief.
"The bottom line: Republicans eliminated a program that provides $538 million each biennium in property tax relief and replaced it with a program that provides $0 in property tax relief," Thissen wrote in a recent e-mail to constituents.
Thissen's claim is correct.
The Evidence
Previously, people who owned property valued at less than $413,800 got a tax break. The credit got bigger as property value declined. The state reimbursed communities for the property tax loss.
But in recent years, the state wasn't always coming through with the money, so the Legislature and Gov. Mark Dayton eliminated the credit program in the latest budget to save some cash. It was replaced with an alternative that is still meant to target those owning property valued at less than $413,800, but now the state won't be reimbursing taxing jurisdictions for the money they miss out on as the result.
So, the state is providing "$0 in property tax relief" to local governments. According to the Minnesota Department of Revenue, eliminating the credit will save $538 million in the next biennium - the equivalent that would have been "provided" to communities as Thissen said.
Many property owners will see higher taxes because Minnesota taxing jurisdictions are weighing property tax increases to make up for lost state aid.
As an aside, it's important to point out that, while Thissen and the other House Democrats voted against the tax portion of the final budget, he frames the elimination of the credit as a Republican effort. The GOP effectively endorsed the plan by voting for the bill, and Dayton did, too, by signing it.
The Verdict
Thissen claimed that the new property tax plan provides "$0 in property tax relief" and he's correct: The state will no longer reimburse localities for the lost aid. And while some properties will be taxed less under the new plan, most will be taxed more.
SOURCES
MPR's Ground Level blog, St. Paul property taxes go down (for a few) and up (for many), by Dave Peters, Oct. 6, 2011
Minnesota Public Radio News, Tax hike saddles business, property owners, by Tom Robertson, October 13, 2011
Minnesota House Legislative Research, Homestead Market Value Credit, accessed Oct. 11, 2011
Minnesota House Legislative Research, The Homestead Market Value Exclusion, accessed Oct. 11, 2011
Minnesota Department of Revenue, Understanding Recent Changes in Homestead Benefits
Minnesota House Legislative Research, Alternative: Pay 2011 under MVHC conversion with no levy change, Sept. 9, 2011
Minnesota House Legislative Research, Alternative: Pay 2011 under MVHC conversion with no levy change, Sept. 20, 2011
Posted at 9:33 PM on October 11, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(5 Comments)
Filed under: Bachmann fact check, PoliGraph
Rep. Michele Bachmann was among the Republican presidential hopefuls who participated in the Washington Post/Bloomberg News debate on Oct. 11.
PoliGraph looked at five statement she made during the discussion, which focused on the economy.
Claim: The federal government caused the economic collapse.
The Facts: It's true that the government played a role in the economic collapse, but the situation is more complicated than Bachmann makes it seem.
In the early 2000s, the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development was trying to put more low-income Americans in homes. News reports at the time of the economic downturn show that HUD urged Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac to purchase loans made to borrowers who couldn't afford them.
In 2008, the Washington Post reported on the subject, writing
"The agency neglected to examine whether borrowers could make the payments on the loans that Freddie and Fannie classified as affordable. From 2004 to 2006, the two purchased $434 billion in securities backed by subprime loans, creating a market for more such lending. Subprime loans are targeted toward borrowers with poor credit, and they generally carry higher interest rates than conventional loans."
Still, it's not just the government that's culpable.
FactCheck.org addressed the issue back in 2008 and came up with this long list of actors in the crisis, which includes the Federal Reserve ("which slashed interest rates after the dot-com bubble burst, making credit cheap"), homebuyers ("who took advantage of easy credit to bid up the prices of homes excessively") and Wall Street ("who paid too little attention to the quality of the risky loans that they bundled into Mortgage Backed Securities [MBS], and issued bonds using those securities as collateral").
The Claim: Nine years from now, Medicare Part B will be "dead, flat broke."
The Facts: It's Medicare Part A, which covers inpatient care, that could soon be suffering financially. But not in nine years, as Bachmann said. Rather, this year's Medicare trustees' report pegs the insolvency date at 2024.The same report says that Medicare Part B, which pays for outpatient care, will be fine for the foreseeable future.
The Claim: The U.S. just eliminated a tax in 2006 that was meant to help pay for the Spanish-American War.
The Facts: Bachmann made this claim to support her case against new taxes, and she's correct. Back in 1898, the federal government imposed a tax on long-distance calls. The levy was initially meant to target the wealthy, who were more likely to have the new technology in their homes. The IRS stopped collecting the 3 percent tax on long-distance calls in 2006.
The Claim: Texas Gov. Rick Perry increased spending by 50 percent during his tenure.
The Facts: Bachmann's in range with this one. PolitiFact Texas looked at the issue recently, and found that spending of state general revenue went up 44 percent during Perry's tenure. That figure drops by 6 percentage points when population growth and inflation are taken into account.
The Claim: The new health care law is the "number one reason" why employers aren't hiring.
The Facts: During the last debate, Bachmann made a similar claim and PoliGraph rated it misleading for several reasons. First, it cites a report that says the new health care law is "arguably" the primary reason employers aren't hiring; it doesn't rely on any sort of formal survey of businesses, and lists 10 other reasons, ranging from the expiration of the Bush-era tax cuts to environmental regulation, that are preventing employers from bringing on new workers.
We also talked to economists - both conservative and liberal - who said that new coverage rules in the health care law may be a top reason why some businesses aren't hiring, but that lagging consumer demand and general economic uncertainty are far more prominent reasons for most businesses.
Further reading: Check out the Washington Post's FactChecker. Their team covered a few of Bachmann's debate claims that we didn't, including her assertion that the U.S. spends 40 percent more than we take in, and that Obama has a secret plan to end Medicare.
The New York Times also fact-checked the debate in real time. Check out their work here.
Posted at 2:09 PM on October 7, 2011
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: PoliGraph
Here's a recent tweet from U.S. Rep. John Kline's Twitter feed:
"2.5 yrs after stimulus, Minn. has LOST 49,500 jobs - a far cry from the 66,000 White House said would be CREATED in MN," wrote Kline, who represents the state's 2nd Congressional District.
Government stimulus is once again a hot topic in Washington, D.C., as President Barack Obama pressures Congress to pass a bill that he contends could keep or create 1.9 million jobs nationally.
Kline essentially gets his numbers right, but 140 characters on Twitter don't tell the whole story.
The Evidence
According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Minnesota had 2.7 million jobs in February 2009, when Obama signed the stimulus bill. At that time, the administration predicted that the legislation would create or preserve 3.5 million jobs nationally within two years, 66,000 of them in Minnesota.
Two and a half years later - a slightly longer timeframe than the White House's - Kline claims that the state lost 49,500 jobs. As his source, Kline points to a memo drafted by Republicans on the U.S. House Ways and Means Committee in early September when the most recent jobs numbers available were from July.
Between February 2009 and July 2011, the state lost 44,000 jobs, according to BLS data. So, Kline's estimate is off, but not by much.
Put in context, Kline's claim is on much shakier ground.
First, Minnesota's jobs outlook has bounced around a lot since the stimulus bill was passed, as it has in many states. In some months, the workforce shrank, and in others it expanded. In fact, the latest employment numbers for August show Minnesota has lost only 15,000 jobs since February 2009.
There are all sorts of complicated reasons why the workforce remains unstable. For instance, consumer demand is lagging, so there's no need for companies to hire more workers to expand supply.
Further, Kline's claim implies that the stimulus bill hasn't created jobs, but that's not true. In June of this year, between 1 million and 2.9 million people owed their jobs to the stimulus bill, according to an August 2011 report from the non-partisan Congressional Budget Office.
In Minnesota, roughly 61,000 stimulus jobs were created through the fourth quarter of 2010, according to a March 2011 report by the administration's Council of Economic Advisors. That's not the 66,000 the White House predicted back in 2009, but it is close.
The Verdict
Kline's numbers are more or less correct, and so is his implication that Minnesota hasn't regained the jobs it had back in February 2009. But his underlying implication that the stimulus bill hasn't created jobs is false.
As a result, Kline's tweet is misleading.
SOURCES
The White House, American Recovery and Reinvestment Act: State-by-State Jobs Impact, Feb. 13, 2009
The U.S. House Ways and Means Committee, Another Unhappy Labor Day for American Workers: Obama Stimulus Created More Unemployment and Debt, but Not the Jobs It Promised, Sept. 2, 2011
The Bureau of Labor Statistics, Regional and State Employment and Unemployment - August 2011, Sept. 16, 2011
The Congressional Budget Office, Estimated Impact of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act on Employment and Economic Output from April 2011 Through June 2011, August 2011
Center for Budget and Policy Priorities, New CBO Report Finds Up to 2.9 Million People Owe Their Jobs to the Recovery Act, By Michael Leachman and Christine Mai, August 30, 2011
Executive Office of the President: Council of Economic Advisers, The Economic Impact of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009, Sixth Quarterly Report, March 18, 2011
Posted at 3:43 PM on October 5, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(1 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
After years of languishing, trade agreements with South Korea, Colombia and Panama are moving swiftly through Congress.
U.S. Rep. Erik Paulsen, a Republican who represents Minnesota's 3rd Congressional District, is a fan of the pacts because they aim to produce jobs in the United States.
"These agreements will increase U.S. exports of goods and services and support the creation of over 250,000 new U.S. jobs," he said on Oct. 3.
Just how many jobs the deals will create is a matter of debate, and Paulsen's estimate is on the high end.
The Evidence
The U.S. Trade Representative's office (USTR) says the South Korea deal could create 70,000 jobs.
The administration isn't giving a jobs estimate for Colombia deal, but a rough ballpark estimate would be about 6,000 jobs based on numbers from the trade office.
As for the Panama deal, there is no export estimate because the effects of the agreement would be very small on the U.S. export market, according to the U.S. International Trade Commission's 2007 analysis of the agreement.
A separate estimate conducted by Sen. Ron Wyden, a Democrat from Oregon who chairs a Senate trade subcommittee, shows that, taking into account changes in the economy since the recession, the South Korea agreement alone could create 280,000 jobs.
All those estimates leave out an important factor: Open trade will increase U.S. exports, but it will also increase U.S. imports, which means some people could lose their jobs. For instance, the Wyden report points out that employees in the manufacturing sector will be vulnerable as a result of the South Korea deal.
Robert Scott, an economist with the Economic Policy Institute, ran the numbers, too, and found that the South Korea and Colombia agreements would result in the loss of 214,000 jobs within seven years of ratification.
The Verdict
Paulsen's jobs estimate is on the high end of a range of estimates. As a result, PoliGraph rates this claim inconclusive.
Rep. Erik Paulsen, Paulsen Statement on Submission of Long-Awaited Trade Agreements, Oct. 3, 2011
YouTube, speech on the floor of the House of Representatives, Rep. Erik Paulsen, Oct. 3, 2011
The House Ways and Means Committee, Camp Sets Deadline for Moving the Three Pending Trade Agreements, But When Will the Administration Act?, Feb. 11, 2011
Bloomberg News, Obama Submits Pending Free-Trade Agreements to Congress, by Eric Martin, Oct. 3, 2011
Bloomberg, Obama Says U.S.-China Trade Spurs Prosperity for Both, By Edwin Chen and Julianna Goldman, Nov. 16, 2009
The New York Times, Free Trade Standoff Is Resolved, by Binyamin Appelbaum, Oct. 3, 2011
The United States International Trade Commission, The U.S.-Colombia Trade Promotion Agreement: Potential Economy-wide and Selected Sectoral Effects, Dec. 2006
The United States International Trade Commission, The U.S.-Korea Trade Promotion Agreement: Potential Economy-wide and Selected Sectoral Effects, Sept. 2007
The United States International Trade Commission, The U.S.-Panama Trade Promotion Agreement: Potential Economy-wide and Selected Sectoral Effects, Sept. 2007
The White House, Statement by the President Announcing the U.S.-Korea Trade Agreement, December 3, 2010
The White House, Fact Sheets: U.S.-Panama Trade Promotion Agreement, April 19, 2011
The White House, Fact Sheets: U.S.-Columbia Trade Agreement and Action Plan, April 6, 2011
Public Citizen, The Incredible Shrinking FTA Jobs Claim, by Travis McArthur, March 25, 2011
The Economic Policy Institute, Trade policy and job loss, By Robert E. Scott, February 25, 2010
E-mail correspondence, Tom Erickson, spokesman, Rep. Erik Paulsen, Oct. 4, 2011
Interview, Robert Scott, economist, Economic Policy Institute, Oct. 5, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on September 30, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: Bachmann fact check, PoliGraph
The third quarter of this year's campaign fundraising cycle ends today, and U.S. Rep. Michele Bachmann is making a last-minute push to make some extra cash.
To grab the attention of potential contributors, Bachmann wrote a fundraising e-mail highlighting a recent poll conducted in Iowa, where she is determined to win the primary.
"As one of my most valued supporters, I wanted to let you in on a secret," Bachmann wrote in the Sept. 29 note. "Our campaign's rising poll numbers have not gone unnoticed. The latest Iowa poll has our campaign in second place, just behind Mitt Romney and ahead of Rick Perry."
Bachmann's spinning the poll numbers.
The Evidence
Bachmann's referring to a new poll conducted by the American Research Group (ARG) of 600 likely Republican caucus-goers living in Iowa.
Among the voters surveyed, 15 percent would vote for Bachmann in the caucuses. That's second to former Massachusetts Gov. Mitt Romney, who has 21 percent support among the same group of people.
But here's what Bachmann left out of her e-mail: The last time ARG conducted their survey in July, she had 21 percent support and was leading the pack of candidates.
So, Bachmann's support has actually declined according to this poll.
ARG's survey is the most recent conducted in Iowa since the end of August, according to Real Clear Politics, a website that houses a range of polling data. Back then, Bachmann was capturing between 15 and 22 percent of the Iowa GOP vote, depending on the poll. So, even compared to other surveys, Bachmann's support has dipped.
It's possible that Bachmann is referring to recent national studies, most of which have her polling in the single digits. But those are surveys of voters throughout the country, not in Iowa.
Bachmann also claims that she has more support than Texas Gov. Rick Perry, her biggest rival in the nomination process. It's true that the ARG poll shows Perry with 14 percent support. But with a margin of error of 4 percentage points, it's not a statistically significant difference.
The Verdict
Bachmann said her support is growing in Iowa. But compared to the last time the same survey was conducted, her support has declined. It's the same story when compared to other recent polls conducted in Iowa. Further, she's not ahead of Perry in the ARG poll; the two are effectively tied for second place.
This claim is misleading to the point of being false.
SOURCES
American Research Group, Iowa Poll, Sept. 22-27, 2011
Real Clear Politics, Polls: Iowa Republican Presidential Caucus, accessed Sept. 30, 2011
Real Clear Politics, Polls: 2012 Republican Presidential Nomination, accessed Sept. 30, 2011
FiveThirtyEight, Perry slumps in polls but not to Romney's gain, by Nate Silver, Sept. 29, 2011
FiveThirtyEight, ARG my brain hurts, by Nate Silver, July 14, 2011
FiveThirtyEight, Pollster Ratings v4.0: Results, by Nate Silver, June 6, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on September 28, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(3 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
As property owners await news of whether their taxes will go up next year, Senate Tax Committee Chair Julianne Ortman, R-Chanhassen, says legislators aren't to blame if they do.
She made her case in an opinion piece published in the Star Tribune on Sept. 20, 2011, pointing out that the conventional wisdom that property taxes go up as state aid declines doesn't always hold true.
"Back in 2010, as now, some at the Capitol assumed local officials would dramatically raise property taxes," she wrote. "In reality, property tax levies across the state went up just 1.9 percent from 2010 to 2011 - the smallest increase since 2002."
Ortman's claim is correct, but it deserves some context.
The Evidence
State aid and property taxes have a long and complicated relationship. For many years, the state has doled out cash to local governments to help them pay for services, such as police and parks, without raising property taxes. The idea is to ensure that less affluent communities - and therefore communities with smaller property tax bases - can provide the same services that wealthy communities can.
In recent years, as Minnesota's budget deficit grew, state aid has frequently been the target of cuts, and in some cases, communities have had to increase property taxes to keep services intact. And relatively slow-growing school funding means some school districts have asked for more tax dollars to pay for education programming.
Ortman's correct that statewide tax levies increased by 1.9 percent between 2010 and 2011, and that it's the smallest increase since 2002, according to data provided by the Minnesota Department of Revenue.
Her claim comes with a few important qualifiers, however.
First, she's talking about a statewide statistic. Some communities saw much larger property tax increases last year, and others saw their property taxes decline. And in other recent years, property taxes statewide have gone up quite a bit. For instance, between 2002 and 2003, taxes increased by 8.8 percent and in 2006, they increased by 9.2 percent from the year before.
Further, there were big changes in the latest budget that will have a significant impact on property taxes going forward. To save money, legislators eliminated the market value homestead credit, which provided some homeowners with property tax breaks and reimbursed cities, counties and school districts for the tax shortfall.
Lawmakers replaced the program with a new tax break, but the state will no longer be making up the cash communities are missing as a result of a smaller tax base.
That means some communities will likely increase their tax levy. And even if they don't, some property owners will find themselves paying more in taxes regardless, local officials say.
The Verdict
While it's important to view Ortman's claim in context, she's correct that last year's levy increase was the smallest in nearly a decade. This claim earns an accurate.
SOURCES
The Star Tribune, Local taxes come from local governments (don't blame GOP), by Sen. Julianne Ortman, Sept. 20, 2011
The Minnesota Department of Revenue, Certified 2011 Property Tax Levies, accessed Sept. 27, 2011
Minnesota Public Radio News, Minnesota's property tax change comes into focus -- kind of, by Dave Peters, Sept. 23, 2011
Email exchange, Peter Winiecki, spokesman, Sen. Julianne Ortman, Sept. 27, 2011
Email exchange and data from Lisa Erickson, spokeswoman, Minnesota Department of Revenue, Sept. 27, 2011
Posted at 2:20 PM on September 23, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(5 Comments)
Filed under: Bachmann fact check, PoliGraph
Last night, the GOP presidential candidates met in Orlando, Fla., to debate, and all the candidates were generous with their misstatements, exaggerations and falsehoods.
PoliGraph looks at two claims made by presidential hopeful Rep. Michele Bachmann during the event.
"President Obama has the lowest public approval ratings of any president in modern times."
Currently, Obama's approval rating is around 43 percent, according to several recent polls; the lowest of his term was 41 percent, according to the Roper Center, which collects public opinion data.
Still, Obama's lowest approval rating is higher than every other president before him going back to John F. Kennedy, whose lowest approval rating was 56 percent. The lowest of the last 13 presidents was George W. Bush, who had a 19 percent approval rating in October 2008 - right around the time the economy plummeted.
Bachmann gets this claim wrong.
"This week, a study came out from UBS that said the number-one reason why employers aren't hiring is because of Obamacare."
Bachmann's talking about a recent UBS Investment Research report that says that "arguably the biggest impediment to hiring (particularly hiring of less skilled workers) is healthcare reform."
It doesn't appear that the authors from the financial firm did any sort of formal survey to support the statement, and the report goes on to list 10 other issues, from the expiration to the Bush tax cuts to air pollution rules, that are causing employers to be wary of adding to payrolls.
But the authors of the report give special attention to the health care law, writing that "it impedes employment by systematically raising the price of labor, by making it much more complicated for small companies to increase payrolls, and by encouraging companies to stay 'under the limit' of 50 employees."
"Under the limit" refers to a new requirement that employers with more than 50 workers must offer health insurance or pay a fine instead. The prospect of the higher cost may be deterring some business owners from hiring, said Michael Tanner, who's a senior fellow with the Cato Institute, a free-market think-tank.
But executives are also worried about tax and regulatory uncertainty, not to mention lagging consumer demand, Tanner said.
"To say [the health care law] is the biggest reason, that's a stretch," he said.
Ken Goldstein, an economist with the Conference Board, agrees with Tanner's point about consumer demand. Employers don't hire when consumers aren't buying and it becomes "a vicious cycle," Goldstein said. "They're both waiting, they're both stuck."
Bachmann cites the report accurately. But it's just one study, and it makes a conclusion about the effect of the health care law on hiring without backing it up with specific data. Economists generally agree that employers aren't hiring for a complicated web of reasons, not primarily the new health care law. As a result, PoliGraph finds the claim misleading.
Listen to reporter Catharine Richert discuss Bachmann's claims on Friday's All Things Considered:
SOURCES
Politisite.com, Transcript of Fox News-Google GOP Presidential Debate, Sept. 22, 2011
The Wall Street Journal, How the Presidents Stack Up, accessed Sept. 23, 2011
The Roper Center, Presidential Approval Highs and Lows, accessed Sept. 23, 2011
UBS Investment Research, Great Suppression II: Revolt of the Employers, Sept. 19, 2011
The Washington Post, With consumers slow to spend, businesses are slow to hire, by Neil Irwin, Aug. 21, 2011
The New York Times, In the real world will the jobs plan make a difference, Employers Say Jobs Plan Won't Lead to Hiring Spur, by Motoko Rich, Sept. 9, 2011
The U.S. Chamber of Commerce, The State of American Business 2011, Jan. 11, 2001
Interview, Michael Tanner, senior fellow, the Cato Institute, Sept. 23, 2011
Interview, Ken Goldstein, economist, the Conference Board, Sept. 23, 2011
Posted at 2:20 PM on September 21, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
This fall, roughly 130 Minnesota school districts will put school levies to a vote.
Some of them will be asking for more tax money to fund education programming, an effort that has caught the attention of some Republican lawmakers who say schools got a big boost in the state's new budget and shouldn't be asking for more.
Democrats are defending the proposed levy increases, saying this biennium's education financing isn't as robust as Republicans say it is.
Two lawmakers at the center of the issue, state Rep. Pat Garofalo, R-Farmington, and Rep. Mindy Greiling, DFL-Roseville, debated the subject on the Sept. 16 episode of TPT's Almanac. Garofalo is chairman of the House Education Finance Committee and Greiling is the ranking member.
As voters consider the levies, they'll be hearing a lot of conflicting, confusing numbers from both sides of the aisle.
Here's how PoliGraph sorts them out.
Republicans are inflating school funding by "counting things like local school levies."
During the interview, Greiling said that Republicans, including Garofalo, are using accounting tricks to boost funding numbers.
Her claim stems from a flier circulated earlier this month by the House GOP caucus that showed a statewide average increase in per-pupil funding of $488, and major funding increases in some individual districts.
To come up with that figure, the GOP compared the previous biennium's education budget to the current biennium's education budget which includes some funding sources outside the Legislature's control, namely local referendum dollars. While the Legislature approves caps on levies, it's up to the voters in each district to decide how much is ultimately approved.
Some school districts will receive $400, $500 or $600 more per student in state funding.
Even without accounting for local levies, some districts will see large per-pupil funding increases, as Garofalo correctly pointed out in the Almanac interview. More than 100 of the state's 521 districts and charter schools will get per-pupil funding increases of more than $400 in fiscal year 2013.
State aid for schools is increasing by $650 million this biennium.
During the interview, Garofalo also said that state aid is increasing by more than $650 million this biennium. He's using solid numbers, but his claim also leaves out some details.
In the last biennium, the state spent about $13.8 billion on K-12 education, and the current biennium it will spend about $14.5 billion - a difference of roughly $700 million and in range of the $650 million Garofalo mentioned in the interview.
The increase is comprised of about $500 million in automatic spending increases, such as special education aid, and about $200 million in new funding approved by the Legislature in the most recent budget.
Democrats and Republicans have been at odds all session over how to measure education spending changes, and Garofalo's claim underscores that dispute.
DFLers say that Republicans are wrong to publicize the $500 million in automatic spending as an increase because schools would have received it regardless of legislative action; schools typically prepare budgets based on what they'll get in addition to automatic aid. Democrats argue that even those regular increases don't always cover the costs of education programming because they haven't kept up with the rate of inflation.
Republicans counter that an increase in state aid is an increase in state aid; lawmakers could have voted to scale back those automatic spending boosts but didn't.
SOURCES
Minnesota Public Radio News, GOP lawmakers question need for school district levies, by Tim Pugmire, Sept. 12, 2011
Minnesota Public Radio News, School districts defend funding, ballot referendums, by Tom Weber, Sept. 16, 2011
Minnesota Public Radio News, Some GOP lawmakers don't follow Garofalo's lead opposing school levies, by Tim Pugmire, Sept. 20, 2011
MinnPost, Accounting Trick Explains Minnesota Schools' So-Called Windfall, by Beth Hawkins, Sept. 8, 2011
GOP flier, Kids first: Making education a priority during challenging times, accessed Sept. 20, 2011
Fiscal Year 2013 K-12 Major Revenue: Special Session Compared to Baseline, accessed Sept. 21, 2011
Fiscal Year 2013 K-12 Major Revenue: Special Session Compared to FY 11, accessed Sept. 21, 2011
Interview, Rep. Pat Garofalo, Sept. 20, 2011
Interview, Greg Crowe, House Fiscal Staff, Sept. 19, 2011
Interview, Tom Melcher, Minnesota Department of Education, Sept. 20, 2011
Interview, Charlie Vander Aarde, DFL spokesman, Sept. 20, 2011
Posted at 2:32 PM on September 16, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(1 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
President Barack Obama unveiled his plan to grow jobs earlier this month, and he said it's getting great reviews from economists.
"When you look at what independent economists are saying about the American Jobs Act... uniformly what they are saying is this buys us insurance against a double-dip recession, and it almost certainly helps the economy grow and will put more people back to work," he said in an interview with NBC News's Brian Williams.
Uniform approval? No. Lots of compliments with a few important caveats? Yes.
The Evidence
Among other things, Obama's job plan would extend and expand the Social Security payroll tax cut; give businesses a $4,000 tax break for hiring the long-term unemployed; extend unemployment benefits; and increase spending on public works projects.
Many economists say they like Obama's plan, and that the plan would help stave off a second recession and create jobs.
For instance, Mark Zandi, chief economist with Moody's Analytics and former economic adviser to Sen. John McCain, called it a "laudable effort" that would "go a long way toward stabilizing confidence, forestalling another recession, and jump-starting a self-sustaining economic expansion."
He estimates that Obama's plan would add nearly 2 million jobs to the workforce, reduce the unemployment rate by a percentage point, and boost economic growth by 2 percentage points next year.
An estimate by another firm called Macroeconomic Advisers was similarly optimistic, saying the plan would boost GDP by total of 1.3 percent and create roughly 1.3 million jobs by the end of 2012.
Still, even economists who support the plan have some qualms. Some expressed concern that it doesn't deal with mortgage debt, which many economists say is the root of the nation's financial woes.
Others question whether consumers will spend the extra cash they get from the payroll tax cut. And if they do, some suggest that the money will end up creating jobs overseas because the nation imports a lot of goods.
Of course, the plan has critics, too. James Sherk of the conservative-leaning Heritage Foundation wrote that unemployment benefits should not be extended because they do little to boost the economy.
And Peter Morici, a professor at the University of Maryland's business school, wondered in an op-ed how the plan's $447 billion price tag fits into the long-term goal of dealing with the deficit.
The Verdict
Obama exaggerated a bit by saying that, uniformly, economists say his plan will work; some take serious issue with the proposal. Still, many have mostly good things to say about the strategy, and at least two estimates support the underlying goal of Obama's plan, which is to grow jobs and boost the economy.
For his first PoliGraph test, Obama's claim leans toward accurate.
SOURCES
NBC News, Obama: Jobs plan is insurance against a 'recession', Sept. 12, 2011
The White House, Fact Sheet and Overview, Sept. 8, 2011
The Los Angeles Times, Economists give Obama's jobs plan mixed reviews, By Don Lee and Jim Puzzanghera, Sept. 8, 2011
The Washington Post, Obama jobs plan: Economists give good reviews but say more needed on mortgage debt, by Zachary A. Goldfarb, Sept. 9, 2011
USA Today, Many economists say Obama jobs plan will help, by Paul Wiseman
National Public Radio, Economists weigh effectiveness of Obama jobs plan, by Marilyn Geewax, Sept. 9, 2011
Moody's Analytics, An analysis of Obama's jobs plan, by Mark Zandi, Sept. 9, 2011
Macroeconomic Advisers, American Jobs Act: A Significant Boost to GDP and Employment, Sept. 8, 2011
UPI, Will Obama put Americans' jobs ahead of his own?, by Peter Morici, Sept. 16, 2011
The Heritage Foundation, Extended UI Payments Do Not Benefit the Economy, by James Sherk, Sept. 8, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on September 14, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
In recent weeks, school funding has become a flashpoint between DFL and Republican lawmakers.
Republicans say they've increased school funding, a claim that PoliGraph ruled misleading. And they're speaking out against districts that are trying to increase levies to pay for schools.
Meanwhile, DFL leaders are claiming that a decision to delay payments to school districts included in the state's budget was a Republican idea.
During a press conference to announce a state-wide tour to talk about school support, House Minority Leader Paul Thissen said, "The school shift is a Republican policy that comes from the fact that they're unwilling to ask millionaires to help out and resolve our state budget deficit."
It's difficult to pinpoint when the accounting move originated because budget negotiations were held behind closed doors. But it's clear that both sides agreed to the budget fix.
The Evidence
Delaying school payments is a budget balancing technique that's used regularly. Schools are given some state aid immediately, and the rest later. Technically, it is not considered a cut in funding, but the delays do complicate the budgeting process for schools; some have been forced to borrow money.
Former Gov. Tim Pawlenty delayed payments to schools to close the state's budget gap. During his campaign, Gov. Mark Dayton said he would pay back $1.4 billion in delayed aid during his first budget cycle.
But when faced with the state's massive budget deficit, Dayton abandoned his plan and instead pushed-off the payments a second time.
Throughout the legislative session, lawmakers worked to close the deficit, and in the final days before the government shutdown that started on July 1, 2011, they were still $1.4 billion short.
It's hard to say exactly when talk of delayed payments to schools resurfaced because lawmakers held their negotiations behind closed doors. Thissen said the GOP first raised the possibility of saving $350 million by delaying additional school payments on June 29, and shared notes from that meeting with MPR News to support his claim.
But a spokeswoman for the House GOP said she couldn't confirm the discussion.
Over the following two days, the parties exchanged offers on paper. According to a letter dated June 30, Dayton considered making up most of the $1.4 billion shortfall by delaying half of the money schools were promised.
The same day, the GOP countered with a scaled back version of the delayed payments that would save $700 million in addition to the $1.4 billion already included in Dayton's initial budget, and that's the combination of savings that ended up in the final funding deal.
The Verdict
Thissen contends Republicans forced the Legislature to adopt additional school payments. While it's true that the first round of delays wouldn't have been on the books had it not been for Pawlenty, both parties at one point or another put additional school funding delays on the table during budget negotiations.
Thissen's claim is misleading.
SOURCES
Minnesota Public Radio News, DFLers plan statewide meetings critical of GOP education policies, by Tim Pugmire, Sept. 6, 2011
Minnesota Management and Budget, Gov. Mark Dayton's FY 2012-2013 Biennial Budget, accessed September 14, 2011
MPR's Shutdown 2011 Blog, Final budget offers, accessed September 14, 2011
Interview, Rep. Paul Thissen, September 8, 2011
Email exchange, Jodi Boyne, spokeswoman House GOP, September 8, 2011
Posted at 3:03 PM on September 8, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(4 Comments)
Filed under: Bachmann fact check, PoliGraph
During the Republican presidential debate at the Reagan Library, Rep. Michele Bachmann raised a talking point that's become standard fare at her campaign events:
Government regulation is expensive for businesses and will result in job losses.
Bachmann hinted that even President Barack Obama agrees.
"I think it's important to note that the president recognized how devastating the [Environmental Protection Agency] has been in their rulemaking, so much so that the president had to suspend current EPA rules that would have led to the shutting down of potentially 20 percent of all of America's coal plants," she said during last night's debate.
Bachmann is overestimating.
The Evidence
Bachmann's spokeswoman did not respond to an email to clarify her boss's statement, but it appears Bachmann is talking about Obama's controversial withdrawal of a rule that would have put stricter regulations on smog.
In that case, Bachmann's context is correct. In a statement, Obama said he stopped the proposed rules from moving forward because he's worried about the impact on the recovering economy. The administration estimates that the rules would have cost between $19 billion and $90 billion.
But Bachmann is conflating her facts.
First, this is just one rule, not several as Bachmann said. It's one of four the coal industry is especially worried about, the rest of which are still in the works, according to Luke Popovich, a spokesman for the National Mining Association.
All together, the impact of those rules could close 20 percent of the nation's coal-fired plants, according to the trade organization. Other studies support that figure, though it's important to note that 20 percent is on the high end depending on the scope of the new rules. And it appears that much of the impact would come from a rule dealing with mercury and air toxics standards for power plants.
The Verdict
The coal industry is worried about several proposed rules, not just the smog rule that Obama shelved. If all those regulations go into effect, upwards of 20 percent of the nation's coal-fired power plants could close.
For getting her facts mixed up, Bachmann's claim rates a false.
SOURCES
The New York Times, The Republican Debate at the Reagan Library, Sept. 7, 2011
Minnesota Public Radio News via the Associated Press, Concerned about jobs, Obama ditches tough EPA smog rule, by Julie Pace and Dina Cappiello, Sept. 2, 2011
The White House, Statement by the President on the Ozone National Ambient Air Quality Standards, Sept. 2, 2011
Charles River Associates, A Reliability Assessment of EPA's Proposed Transport Rule and Forthcoming Utility MACT, Dec. 16, 2011
The Brattle Group, Brattle Study Estimates EPA Regulations May Result in Over 50,000 MW of Coal Plant Retirements and Up to $180 Billion in Compliance Costs, Dec. 8, 2010
Reuters, U.S. rules seen shutting 20 percent of coal power capacity, July 27, 2011
Environmental Protection Agency, Air Toxics Standards for Utilities, accessed Sept. 8, 2011
ICF International, Retiring Coal Plants While Protecting System Reliability, July 26, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on September 2, 2011
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: PoliGraph
In a role reversal, some Republicans are advocating for what amounts to a tax increase and some Democrats are pushing for a tax cut.
At issue is the extension of a payroll tax cut Congress passed last year. It's due to expire in December.
During a press conference on Aug. 26, state Democratic-Farmer-Labor party chairman Ken Martin asked the state's GOP delegation to make clear where they stand on the issue. He also highlighted President Obama's tax record.
"President Obama has cut taxes for 95 percent of working families and has cut taxes for small businesses 17 times," he said.
Martin's statement is true.
The Evidence
The stimulus bill included a handful of tax cuts that affected roughly 96 percent of the population, according to the Tax Policy Center, a tax think-tank in Washington, D.C.
According to the same group, nearly all workers are benefiting from last year's agreement to lower workers' Social Security payroll contributions from 6.2 percent to 4.2 percent of their wages.
Since Obama took office, taxes have been cut for small businesses - and larger companies, too - 17 times. The perks are buried in different bills, and include a tax credit for hiring people who have been out of work for at least two months, a new deduction for health care expenses for the self-employed, and eliminating the capital gains tax on some small business investments.
The White House touts those 17 cuts on its website, and the president's critics don't dispute the figure. They do, however, point out that taxes have also increased for some of these same businesses; a penalty on employers with more than 50 workers that do not offer health insurance is a frequently cited example. The fine goes into effect in 2014.
Others, argue that because the cuts are targeted, they're more like loopholes or tax expenditures. Will McBride, an economist at the conservative Tax Foundation, said such cuts only serve to make the tax code more complex.
"It doesn't sound like good tax policy," he said.
The Verdict
Martin's statement is correct. Between the stimulus bill and the payroll tax cut, taxes have been cut for about 95 percent of taxpayers. And since Obama's been in office, small businesses have benefited from 17 tax cuts.
SOURCES
DFL press conference, Aug. 26, 2011
PolitiFact.com, Tax cut for 95 percent? The stimulus made it so, by Angie Drobnic Holan, January 28, 2010
The White House Blog, Seventeen Small Business Tax Cuts and Counting, Feb. 25, 2011
The New York Times, For Some in G.O.P., a Tax Cut Not Worth Embracing, by Jennifer Steinhauer, Aug. 25, 2011
The Kaiser Family Foundation, Summary of the new health reform law, accessed Sept. 1, 2011
The Tax Policy Center, Impact of Senator Obama's Tax Proposals as Described by Economic Advisors on Workers, Distribution of Federal Tax Change by Cash Income Percentile, 2009, Oct. 2008
PolitiFact, The Obama administration has cut taxes on small businesses 17 times, by Robert Farley, June 12, 2011
The Internal Revenue Service, The Making Work Pay Credit, accessed Sept. 1, 2011
Email exchange, Kristin Sosanie, spokeswoman, Minnesota DFL, Sept. 1, 2011
Interview, Roberton Williams, the Tax Policy Center, Sept. 1, 2011
Interview, Will McBride, the Tax Foundation, Sept. 2, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on August 31, 2011
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: PoliGraph
While Gov. Mark Dayton tours the state to talk jobs, the Senate Republican Caucus is circulating a flier via Twitter that criticizes what they call Dayton's anti-job administration.
During the legislative session, Dayton wanted to raise taxes on the state's wealthiest, which the GOP said would discourage businesses from hiring.
To make their case, the Republicans say in the flier that, "After cutting taxes and declaring the state 'open for business,' Wisconsin created 12,900 new private-sector jobs in June. ... This represents the largest one-month gain of private-sector jobs in Wisconsin since 2003."
The Senate GOP gets its numbers right, but the job situation in Wisconsin is far more nuanced than the flier lets on.
The Evidence
It's true that Wisconsin added 12,900 private sector jobs in June - the largest since 2003. In fact, the state's Department of Workforce Development later increased that figure to 14,800 private sector jobs.
These numbers are seasonally adjusted, but economists in Wisconsin point out that many jobs added in June were food service and leisure positions, which tend to disappear once the weather gets colder.
Economists also highlight that in July, the previous gains in the private sector were wiped out when Wisconsin lost 12,500 jobs from nearly all the state's industries.
On the whole, Wisconsin has been gaining jobs since January, 2010, when the state had its lowest post-recession job numbers. But month-to-month numbers are all over the map.
"A big jump up followed by a big jump down means the recovery is still rickety," said Laura Dresser, associate director of the Center on Wisconsin Strategy, a economics think tank.
Wisconsin's job climate reflects national trends, she said. Republican Gov. Scott Walker's administration echoed that observation when the July numbers came out.
If it were specifically Walker's policies at play, job growth would be sustained month-to-month, Dresser added.
That's precisely the point the Senate GOP's flier tries to make: Walker's new tax cuts led to job growth.
While several business-friendly, but relatively small, tax perks were adopted shortly after Walker entered office, they aren't immediate. So it's impossible to say whether they are directly related to the June jobs increase, economists say.
Still, it's possible businesses are hiring based Walker's overall tax platform, said Abdur Chowdhury, chair of the Department of Economics at Marquette University.
"The perception among the business community has been more positive," he said.
The Verdict
It's true that Wisconsin saw substantial job growth in June. But it lost an equal number of job losses the following month, which economists say mean one thing: much like the rest of the nation, Wisconsin's jobs climate is still a roller coaster.
As a result, the GOP flier is misleading.
SOURCES
Senate Republican Caucus flier on Dayton's job record, Aug. 30, 2011
The Milwaukee Journal Sentinel, State reports a gain of 12,900 private-sector jobs, by John Schmid, July 21, 2011
The Milwaukee Journal Sentinel,Wisconsin loses 12,500 private-sector jobs in July, by John Schmid, Aug. 18, 2011
The Department of Workforce Development, June Jobs Report, July 21, 2011
The Department of Workforce Development, July Jobs Report, Aug.18, 2011
Fox News, Channel 6, Governor Scott Walker signs tax cut bill, Jan. 31, 2011
MacIver Institute, Wisconsin's New Jobs Account for More than Half of Nation's Net Gain for June: While Nation Sputters on Jobs, Wisconsin Economy Begins to Hum, July 21, 2011
FactCheck.org, Walker's Tax Cuts, by Eugene Kiely, March 4, 2011
Wisconsin Budget Project, Live by jobs report, die by jobs report, Aug. 18, 2011
Center on Wisconsin Strategy, Wisconsin saw job growth in June, but the state is still suffering, June 2011
Email exchange, Chris Van Guilder, spokesman, Senate Republican Caucus, Aug. 30, 2011
Email exchange, John Dipko, spokesman, Wisconsin Department of Workforce Development, Aug. 31, 2011
Interview, Laura Dresser, Center on Wisconsin Strategy, Aug. 31, 2011
Interview, Abdur Chowdhury, Marquette University, Aug. 30, 2011
Interview, Andy Feldman, BadgerStat, Aug. 30, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on August 24, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(5 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
If you've been filling up at gas stations in Minnesota's third congressional district, you may have noticed this political ad at the pump:
"Congressman Erik Paulsen voted to cut taxes for millionaires and end your Medicare."
The signs are part of a media blitz paid for by the Democratic Congressional Campaign Committee (DCCC), the fundraising arm for Democrats in the U.S. House of Representatives. The effort targets 44 Republicans including U.S. Rep. Erik Paulsen.
The DCCC's ad treads a fine line between accurate and misleading.
The Evidence
The DCCC ad focuses on a budget resolution written by Budget Committee Chairman Rep. Paul Ryan and passed by the House in April.
Paulsen voted for the resolution. It's important to know that the bill is basically Congressional guidance for spending and revenue changes. So even if Ryan's plan had passed the Senate - which it didn't - it would not have cut taxes or changed Medicare.
It's true that the resolution included a provision to lower the top income tax rate from 35 percent to 25 percent, which could have affected the nation's top earners.
The second part of the DCCC's ad - that Paulsen voted to "end your Medicare" - is more nuanced.
The Ryan plan would have changed Medicare for those currently younger than 55, not seniors already enrolled or about to enroll in the program, as the DCCC ad implies.
Furthermore, Ryan's plan would not have ended Medicare per se, but it would have changed it dramatically for those 55 or younger.
Currently, the government pays doctors and hospitals for treating Medicare patients. Ryan's plan would have replaced the system with a voucher program. Beneficiaries would have used the cash to buy a private health insurance policy best suited for their medical needs.
Ryan also proposed linking the value of those vouchers to the Consumer Price Index, which has lagged behind increases in the cost of medical care. Over time, the payments Ryan proposed would buy less coverage as a result, and seniors would end up paying extra for coverage, according to the Congressional Budget Office.
Experts PoliGraph spoke with are split on whether the DCCC's claim is fair. Some, including Richard Kaplan, an elder law expert at the University of Illinois Urbana-Champaign, say that Ryan's plan would have meant big changes to the current program, but it still would have provided government support.
Meanwhile, Karen Davis, a health policy expert with the Commonwealth Fund, agrees with the ad because Ryan's plan would have gutted Medicare's financial commitments and made the current program unrecognizable.
The Verdict
It's true that Paulsen voted for a budget framework that proposed cutting taxes for the nation's wealthiest and big changes to Medicare.
But the DCCC ad leaves out some important nuances, including the fact that Ryan's proposal wouldn't have affected those currently enrolled or about to enroll in Medicare. Furthermore, the Ryan proposal didn't "end" Medicare; it changed it dramatically.
For leaving out some important details, PoliGraph says this ad is misleading.
SOURCES
The Star Tribune, Democrats hit Paulsen at the pump, by Jeremy Herb, Aug. 23, 2011
The DCCC, DCCC Launches 'Accountability August': Republicans' Choosing Millionaires over Medicare, Aug. 9, 2011
The Washington Post, Votes on the FY 2012 Budget Resolution, accessed Aug. 24, 2011
The Path to Prosperity: Fiscal Year 2012 Budget Resolution, April 2011
The Congressional Budget Office, letter to Rep. Paul Ryan, April 5, 2011
ABC News, House passes Paul Ryan budget proposal in partisan vote, by John Parkinson, April 15, 2011
Health Affairs Blog, Vouchers or premium support: What's in a name?, by Henry Aaron, April 6, 2011
The Internal Revenue Service, 2011 tax rate schedules, accessed Aug. 24, 2011
The Center on Budget and Policy Priorities, Ryan Plan's "Path to Prosperity" Is Just for the Wealthy, by Chuck Marr, April 6, 2011
The Wall Street Journal, GOP Aim: Cut $4 trillion, by Naftali Bendavid, April 4, 2011
Interview, Jesse Ferguson, spokesman, DCCC, Aug. 24, 2011
Interview, Henry Aaron, the Brookings Institution, Aug. 23, 2011
Interview, Karen Davis, the Commonwealth Fund, Aug. 24, 2011
Interview, Richard Kaplan, the University of Illinois Urbana-Champaign, Aug. 23, 2011
Interview, Jack Hoadley, Georgetown University Health Policy Institute, Aug. 24, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on August 5, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(5 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
Rep. Chip Cravaack was one of four Minnesota lawmakers who voted against the bill to raise the nation's $14.3 trillion debt ceiling.
Among his reasons for rejecting the measure is that it would cut defense spending by half.
The debt ceiling "bill risks cutting 50 percent in current military spending, endangering our national security amid an ever-increasing and varied level of credible threats targeting the U.S. and our military operations," he wrote in an Aug. 3, 2011, Duluth News Tribune opinion piece.
Cravaack's claim is false.
The Evidence
The debt ceiling deal immediately trims $917 billion in discretionary spending over 10 years. Those savings are achieved in part by capping "security" spending, which includes the Department of Defense, the State Department, and the Department of Homeland Security, among other branches of government. Congress will ultimately work out the details, but the White House projects that $420 billion will be saved.
The second round of cuts is less certain. A House and Senate panel is supposed to put together a plan by Thanksgiving to slash an additional $1.2-to-$1.5 trillion in spending; it could include defense spending cuts, but no one knows for sure - it's all up to Congress.
What it seems Cravaack is talking about is the worst case scenario, one that budget and defense analysts say is unlikely to occur given how the bill is set up.
If lawmakers can't agree on additional cuts by Thanksgiving, spending would automatically be reduced by $1.2 trillion. Half of those cuts would come from defense spending, and half would come from other areas of government spending. The idea is that conservatives won't want to dig deep into the defense budget, and liberals won't want to cut social safety net programs.
In that regard, Cravaack's statement is inaccurate. He says that the bill "risks cutting 50 percent in current military spending," which is not the case. Rather, half the $1.2 trillion will come from defense spending, which is largely Department of Defense spending.
Budget officials estimate that the federal government is slated to spend in the range of $6 trillion on peacetime defense activities over the next 10 years. To cut that in half would mean trimming $3 trillion from the defense department's budget.
Even if Congress can't work out additional spending cuts by Thanksgiving, the automatic spending cuts would only reduce the defense department's budget by about $490 billion over 10 years (the rest of the $600 billion would be made up in interest savings.) That's still far less than Cravaack's statement implies.
We sent an email to Cravaack's staff asking him to clarify his statement, but received no response.
Update: Cravaack's spokesman did get back to us, saying that his boss was referring to 50 percent of the $1.2 trillion in automatic spending cuts.
The Verdict
Cravaack is wrong. The bill would not cut military spending in half. Instead, if lawmakers can't lay out a plan, half of the $1.2 trillion in automatic spending cuts would come from defense.
SOURCES
The Duluth News Tribune, Congressman's view: Constituents asked for vote against debt deal, by Rep. Chip Cravaack, Aug. 3, 2011
The Cable, Levin and McCain: We have no idea how much debt deal cuts defense, by Josh Rogin, Aug. 2, 2011
Defense Buck Does Not Stop with This Debt Deal, by Winslow T. Wheeler, Aug. 2, 2011
A Dangerous Debt Ceiling Deal, By Kim R. Holmes, Ph.D. August 1, 2011
The Washington Post, Will the defense cuts stick?, by Brad Plumer, Aug. 2, 2011
The House Rules Committee, Text of the Budget Control Act, accessed Aug. 4, 2011
National Public Radio, Pentagon Could See Deep Cuts In Debt Deal, by Rachel Martin, Aug. 3, 2011
The Center for Budget and Policy Priorities, How the Potential Across-the-Board Cuts in the Debt Limit Deal Would Occur, by Richard Kogan, Aug. 4, 2011
Center for Strategic and Budgetary Assessments, Defense Funding in the Budget Control Act of 2011, by Todd Harrison, August 2011
The White House, Security Spending in the Deficit Agreement, by Office of Management and Budget director Jack Lew, Aug. 4, 2011
The Congressional Budget Office, estimated impact of the Budget Control Act of 2011, Aug. 1, 2011
Interview, Winslow Wheeler, the Center for Defense Information, Aug. 4, 2011
Interview, Lawrence Korb, the Center for American Progress, Aug. 4, 2011
Interview, James Carafano, the Heritage Foundation, Aug. 4, 2011
Interview, Todd Harrison, the Center for Strategic and Budgetary Assessments, Aug. 5, 2011
Email exchange, Michael Bars, spokesman for Rep. Chip Cravaack, Aug. 4, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on August 3, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(11 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
Hours before the U.S. House of Representatives voted to raise the debt ceiling, Minnesota DFL Rep. Keith Ellison announced he couldn't support the plan because it cuts spending too deeply.
He also said the deal is unprecedented.
"This is the first time in the history of the United States that a debt ceiling increase, which is a routine thing, has been linked to deficit cuts, right - and budget cuts," he said. "This is the first time."
Several lawmakers, including Ellison, have repeated this claim. And they're all wrong.
The Evidence
The deal signed into law this week would raise the debt ceiling immediately by $900 billion and cut spending by $917 billion over 10 years. Congress will next have to approve a second ceiling increase of between $1.2 trillion and $1.5 trillion later this year, after a joint congressional committee identifies up to $1.5 trillion in additional cuts.
Automatic spending cuts kick in if Congress can't follow the plan.
Certainly the deal is unique in its savings and debt targets, but it's not the first time Congress has linked spending cuts to an increase in the debt ceiling:
1985: As part of a $175 billion debt limit increase, Congress first approved the Gramm-Rudman-Hollings Act. While there were no specific spending cuts outlined in the legislation, the language set deficit reduction targets. Across-the-board cuts were built into the bill to keep the deficit from exceeding those targets - much like the triggers in the most recent debt deal.
1997: Former President Bill Clinton struck a deal with congressional Republicans to cut a net of $122 billion in mandatory spending over five years and raise the debt limit to $5.95 trillion from $5.5 trillion as part of the Balanced Budget Act of 1997.
2010: A $1.9 trillion debt ceiling increase also revived statutory pay-as-you-go rules that require spending cuts under certain circumstances. If Congress were to cut taxes or mandated spending increases, spending would automatically be cut in other areas, though programs such as Social Security and Medicaid are exempt.
In other instances, lawmakers have attached a debt ceiling increase to budget bills essentially to accommodate projected spending.
Ellison's spokeswoman could not provide sourcing for the claim, saying that the lawmaker had heard it from colleagues.
The Verdict
Ellison said raising the nation's borrowing limit has never been paired with deficit cuts. But a look back on the debt ceiling's history shows that it's not the first time Congress has linked cuts and debt targets.
His claim is false.
SOURCES
National Public Radio News, Ellison Offers Progressive View Of Debt Deal, Aug. 1, 2011
The Congressional Budget Office, the Budget Control Act of 2011, Aug. 1, 2011
The Associated Press, Questions and answers about the debt-deficit deal, by Jim Abrams, August 2, 2011
The White House, Office of Management and Budget, Historical Table: Debt Limit Increases, accessed July 28, 2011
Reuters, Factbox - Key elements of U.S. debt deal, Aug. 1, 2011
The Committee for a Responsible Federal Budget, Understanding the Debt Limit, July 14, 2011
PolitiFact Florida, Allen West says spending cuts are part of the debt ceiling increase for the first time in history, by Angie Drobnic Holan, July 29, 2011
The Congressional Research Service, The Debt Limit: History and Recent Increases, July 20, 2011
THOMAS, Summary of the Balanced Budget Act of 1997, accessed Aug. 2, 2011
The Congressional Research Service, Debt-Limit Legislation in the Congressional Budget Process, May 8, 1998
Interview, the Center for Budget and Policy Priorities, Aug. 2, 2011
Interview, Ed Lorenzen, Senior Advisor, Committee for a Responsible Federal Budget, Aug. 2, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on July 29, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(7 Comments)
Filed under: Bachmann fact check, PoliGraph
In a speech at the National Press Club Thursday, Rep. Michele Bachmann focused on the national debt, the debt limit debate raging in Washington, D.C., and what she perceives as unwelcome government intrusion under President Obama's administration.
PoliGraph reviewed three of her statements and found mixed verdicts.
President Obama's debt limit increase "will be the largest debt increase in the history of the nation."
Amidst ongoing negotiations over the debt ceiling, the new limit is a moving target. But generally, Obama wants to raise the $14.3 trillion debt cap by about $2.4 trillion - enough credit to keep the nation from having another vote on the issue before the 2012 elections.
A $2.4 trillion increase would be the largest in nominal and inflation adjusted dollars since1940, the year after Congress created a universal cap for all the nation's debt (previously, there had been separate caps for different types of spending).
Bachmann gets this claim correct.
"If we allow President Obama to pass the proposed increase in the national debt, we will have - and catch your breath - almost doubled our national debt from the 2006 level when I was elected to Congress."
At first blush, Bachmann's claim is correct. On Dec. 31, 2006, the nation's debt was roughly $8.67 trillion, according to the Treasury Department. If Obama gets the $2.4 trillion increase he's seeking, the $14.3 trillion debit limit will rise to $16.7 trillion.
But Bachmann's claim is misleading because it implies that it's Obama's spending habits that caused the financial mess; it's more complicated than that.
It's true that in 2009, Obama's first year in office, the deficit was a whopping $1.4 trillion, according to the Congressional Budget Office (CBO) - about $960 billion more than the previous fiscal year. And in fiscal year 2010, the nation's debt increased by about $1.7 trillion.
But the trend started under the Bush administration. In fiscal year 2009, the nation's debt increased by about $1.9 trillion. About $245 billion of new spending inherited by Obama stemmed from the Troubled Asset Relief Program (TARP) and payments to Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac. And in Bush's last year in office, revenue declined by $419 billion as the result of the economic downturn.
Our debt also stems from Bush's tax cuts and the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan accounted for $500 billion of the deficit in 2009 and will account for $7 trillion in deficits through 2019, according to the Center for Budget and Policy Priorities.
Of course, Obama's responsible, too. His stimulus bill added $200 billion to the 2009 deficit. And for fiscal year 2011, which ends on Sept. 30, CBO projects a $1.5 trillion deficit, in part due to the extension of the Bush tax cuts under Obama's administration.
Bachmann leaves out details about the origin of our debt, so this claim is misleading.
"Twenty-five years ago or so, almost all student loans were private. Today, 100 percent of student loans are government."
Bachmann's staff didn't provide background for this claim, but 25 years ago in 1986, federally guaranteed aid was available. According to the College Board, roughly $17.6 million of the $38 million in all education aid given out that year was in the form of government in loans.
In school year 2009-10, 44 percent of all school aid came from the federal government, with the rest coming from private loans, colleges and employers.
So, clearly, the federal government isn't giving out all education loans these days; students can easily get a private loan to subsidize their education. According to FinAid, a website that helps students navigate their loans more than $100 billion in federal loans and $10 billion in private student loans are given each year.
Her claim is false.
SOURCES
Minnesota Public Radio News, Midday: Rep. Michele Bachmann speaks at the National Press Club, July 28, 2011
Bloomberg News, Reid to Move on Defeating House Debt-Ceiling Plan Tonight, July 28, 2011
Politico, Reid plan's savings trump Boehner's, by David Rogers, July 27, 2011
The White House, Office of Management and Budget, Historical Table: Debt Limit Increases, accessed July 28, 2011
The Congressional Research Service, The Debt Limit: History and Recent Increases, April 29, 2008
The U.S. Treasury Department, The Debt to the Penny and Who Holds It, accessed July 28, 2011
The Washington Post, CBO projects U.S. budget deficit to reach $1.5 trillion in 2011, highest ever, by Lori Montgomery, Jan. 27, 2011
The Congressional Budget Office, Revenues, Outlays, Deficits, Surpluses, and Debt Held by the Public: 1971 to 2010, in Billions of Dollars, accessed July 28, 2011
The Congressional Budget Office, Monthly Budget Review, November 2009
The Cato Institute, Don't Blame Obama for Bush's 2009 Deficit, by Daniel J. Mitchell, Nov. 19, 2009
The New York Times, How the U.S. Got $14 Trillion in Debt and Who Are the Creditors, July 28, 2011
The Center for Budget and Policy Priorities, Economic Downturn and Bush Policies Continue to Drive Large Projected Deficits, May 10, 2011
The New America Foundation, Federal Student Loan Programs - History, accessed July 28, 2011
Education Sector, Drowning in Debt: The Emerging Student Loan Crisis, July 9, 2008
The College Board, Trends in Student Aid 2010
The College Board, Grants, Loans, and Tax Benefits per Full-Time Equivalent Student over Time, accessed July 29, 2011
Email exchange, Doug Sachtleben, spokesman, Rep. Michele Bachmann, July 28, 2011
Interview, Erin Dillon, Senior Policy Analysis, Education Sector, July 28, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on July 27, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(5 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
DFL House leader Paul Thissen wasted no time using the final budget agreement to solicit cash from voters.
The day after the deal was signed, Thissen penned a fundraising letter, claiming that Republican leadership wouldn't compromise with his party on Gov. Mark Dayton's plan to temporarily raise taxes on Minnesotans wealthiest, "even though it would only affect 7,700 people, and even though only half of those people are Minnesota residents!"
Thissen's claim is basically correct.
The Evidence
During the campaign, Dayton maintained he'd raise taxes on the state's wealthiest to close the budget gap. Once he took office, that plan narrowed. In the final throes of the budget battle, Dayton offered to raise taxes only on Minnesotans making more than $1 million in taxable income annually, and only through 2013.
Republicans roundly rejected the idea, as they have all of Dayton's efforts to increase taxes; they contend that tax hikes will hurt small business owners and potentially prompt people to leave the state.
Thissen points out that half the people who would have been taxed don't live here.
According to the Minnesota Department of Revenue, 7,700 millionaires are expected to file with the state for tax year 2011. About 3,900 of those returns are coming from year-long Minnesota residents.
The rest are from part-time or out-of-state filers. The former are people who move in the middle of the year and pay taxes in Minnesota and another state as a result. Non-residents are those who make money in Minnesota, such as income from a business or rent, but live somewhere else.
The revenue department can't say precisely how many returns are from part-time residents and how many are from non-residents, but estimates that most are from the latter group.
The Verdict
Thissen said that half of the millionaires Dayton's new plan would have taxed don't live in Minnesota year-round. For the most part, he's correct. According to the revenue department, about half of the 7,700 returns from millionaires come from people residing elsewhere.
SOURCES
Letter from Rep. Paul Thissen, July 21, 2011
Minnesota Public Radio News, Dayton puts two new offers on the table, by Catharine Richert, July 6, 2011
Interview, Carrie Lucking, spokeswoman, House DFL Caucus, July 26, 2011
Interview, Minnesota Department of Revenue, Tax Research Division, July 26, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on July 22, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: MN Legislature, PoliGraph
Once again, state lawmakers have agreed to delay payments to schools as a way to balance Minnesota's books.
During a Midday interview on July 20, 2011, Senate Assistant Majority Leader David Hann said the accounting mechanism isn't ideal, but its effects are also short term.
The shifts don't "do anything to diminish the program of education. It doesn't bring any harm to any classroom programs, to any funding," said the Republican. "The total funding is there, it just delays the delivery of the funding for a period of time, and that effect is relatively short term once you get past the initial year of a shift."
Hann's correct, but the issue also deserves some context.
The Evidence
To close the budget gap for the coming two-year budget cycle, Gov. Mark Dayton and Republican legislators agreed to delay $700 million in school payments. That's in addition to $1.4 billion in payments already put off to the next biennium.
Hann is correct that this doesn't represent a cut in school funding - schools will get their state aid, just later than expected. Minnesota law requires future budget surpluses be used to pay cash the state owes the schools.
And he's also correct that schools take the biggest hit in the first year of the shift.
Here's how it works: For the school year that started on July 1, schools will get 60 percent of what they are owed this year, and 30 percent of what they are owed from the previous school year. That means they'll be short 10 percent. To soften the blow, the Legislature also approved a $50 per pupil funding increase this year and next.
But for the school year that starts July 1, 2012, schools will get 60 percent of what they are currently owed, and 40 percent from the year before - 100 percent of their funding.
Hann's larger point, that these shifts don't have a huge impact on schools, is more difficult to measure because schools are coping with the payment delays differently.
This is the third year in a row that the state has changed the school payment formula, so some schools have sought short-term revenue by taking out loans or by selling certificates to investors backed by future aid payments or tax collections. Charter schools are in the same bind, but don't have access to the same low-interest borrowing options that school districts do.
All this short-term borrowing means schools are paying interest and other administrative costs rather than investing that cash in schools, says Charlie Kyte who is executive director of the Minnesota Association of School Administrators.
"The interest they pay on it is money that's not available," Kyte said. "Will they take it out of reserves? Will they take it from their gyms? Will they lay off teachers?"
Schools with larger cash reserves have so far faired better than districts that are struggling, he said. But based on anecdotal evidence, Kyte says his organization estimates 70 percent of Minnesota schools will have to borrow.
The Verdict
While we know that some schools will have to borrow to make it through the latest shift - or have had to borrow already - it's difficult for PoliGraph to say whether Hann's underlying point, that schools aren't cutting programming as a result of the shift, is accurate.
But Hann is correct that schools will eventually get all their money back, and that the effects of payment delay are most burdensome in the first year of the shift.
SOURCES
Minnesota Public Radio News, Midday, July 20, 2011
Minnesota House Legislative Staff, Minnesota School Finance
A Guide for Legislators, September 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, Delayed payments balances books, but burden schools, by Tom Weber, July 5, 2011
School payment shifts illustration, provided by the Senate Education Committee, July 21, 2011
Interview, Dr. Chris Richardson, Northfield public schools superintendent, July 21, 2011
Interview, Scott Croonquist, executive director, Association of Metropolitan School Districts, July 21, 2011
Interview, Jeff Solomon, business manager for Rosemount-Apple Valley-Eagan school district, July 21, 2011
Interview, Eugene Piccolo, Executive Director Minnesota Association of Charter Schools, July 21, 2011
Interview, Peter Winiecki, spokesman, Sen. David Hann, July 22, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on July 13, 2011
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: Mark Dayton, PoliGraph
In an effort to help Gov. Mark Dayton and Republican lawmakers overcome their budget stalemate, a group of six budget experts have suggested a temporary 4 percent income tax increase on all Minnesotans.
Dayton wants to raise income taxes on the state's highest earners to close the budget gap - but not on everyone else.
Property taxes are the reason, he said in a press release responding to the plan.
"Most other Minnesotans are already over-taxed, due primarily to the 75 percent increase in property taxes statewide during the previous eight years."
Dayton's claim is largely accurate.
The Evidence
There are two ways to measure how much property taxes increased over the last eight years.
First, there are local property taxes. They're used to support schools and other local services. In calendar year 2002, property tax revenue amounted to roughly $4.02 billion. In calendar year 2010, local property taxes came in around $7.12 billion.
That's an increase of 77 percent.
If you factor in the property taxes the state collects, which are imposed on businesses and recreational homes, revenue in 2002 was about $4.6 billion. In 2010, property taxes came in at 7.88 billion, amounting to a 71 percent increase - less, but still in range.
As an aside, local property tax increases are an indirect product of decisions made in the Capitol. When state aid declines, as it did during former Gov. Tim Pawlenty's administration, it's city and county officials, not the governor or the Legislature, who decide how much to increase property taxes to continue supporting local services.
The Verdict
All together, property taxes have increased 71 percent over the last eight years. Dayton's off by a few percentage points, but he's basically correct.
SOURCES
Gov. Mark Dayton, Governor Dayton's statement on recommendations from budget committee, July 7, 2011
MPR News, Mondale/Carlson Commission: Tax cigs, alcohol and income, July 7, 2011
Minnesota Department of Revenue, Price of Government, March 2011
Posted at 1:29 PM on June 28, 2011
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: Bachmann fact check, PoliGraph
The day before formally announcing her candidacy for president, Republican Rep. Michele Bachmann did a wide-ranging interview with CBS's Face the Nation.
When host Bob Schieffer quizzed Bachmann about the congressional showdown over raising the debt ceiling, she said President Obama's administration is using "scare tactics" to convince people that it's necessary to increase the amount the nation can borrow.
"The interest on the debt isn't any more than 10 percent of what we're taking in... And so, the Treasury secretary can very simply pay the interest on the debt first then we're not in default."
Bachmann's strategy is easier said than done.
The Evidence
Congress must approve increases to the nation's debt limit, but Congressional leaders and the president have been unable to reach agreement. If Congress doesn't raise the $14.3 trillion ceiling by Aug. 2, the U.S. will be unable to borrow more money to pay for its spending obligations. As a result, it will face default.
Let's now consider the Bachmann's proposal: Delay default by paying bondholders the interest due to them before covering other government costs.
Bachmann's staff didn't respond to our requests for sourcing, but according to the Congressional Budget Office's (CBO) baseline budget projections, the U.S. will bring in about $2.6 trillion in fiscal year 2012, and it will owe about $257 billion in interest payments.That's about 10 percent of revenue, which means Bachmann is correct that the U.S. has enough money to cover the interest payments.
Theoretically, it works: The U.S. never has to raise the debt ceiling and could continue to prioritize making interest payments to avoid default. But budget experts think Bachmann's approach provides a false sense of security and ignores significant spending commitments. The U.S. spends more than it collects in revenue, and that means all sorts of other financial obligations, including federal worker salaries, tax refunds, and Medicare and Medicaid payments, could be delayed.
"Even though it's not as bad as debt default, it still would paint the U.S. as a deadbeat," wrote Donald Marron, director of the Urban-Brookings Tax Policy Center and former CBO director, in a recent commentary.
Treasury Secretary Timothy Geithner has argued that paying interest on the debt - and not fulfilling other obligations -- could ruin the country's reputation in the global market. To underscore that point, he made this analogy:
"A homeowner could decide to 'prioritize' and continue paying monthly mortgage payments, while opting to cease paying other obligations, such as car payments, insurance payments... Although the mortgage would be paid, the damage to that homeowner's creditworthiness would be severe."
The Verdict
Bachmann is correct that there's plenty of revenue to cover U.S. interest on its debt. But her claim is misleading because she makes it sound as if the strategy is a quick fix. In fact, freezing the debt ceiling and paying interest only could create big problems for the U.S. when it comes to other financial obligations.
SOURCES
Face the Nation, transcript, June 26, 2011
The Congressional Budget Office, An Analysis of the President's Budgetary Proposals for Fiscal Year 2012, April 2011
The Economist, Dancing on the ceiling: Talk of America defaulting on its debt is just that, Jan 13. 2011
The Economist, The debt ceiling and default, Jan. 13, 2011
The Treasury Department, Debt Subject to Limit, accessed June 27, 2011
The Washington Post, What's the debt ceiling and why is everyone talking about it?, by Ariana Eunjung Cha, April 18, 2011
The Christian Science Monitor, America is playing with fire with its default talk, by Donald Marron, June 23, 2011
The Treasury Department, Secretary Geithner Sends Debt Limit Letter to Congress, Jan 1, 2011
The Treasury Department, letter to Sen. Patrick Toomey, Feb. 3, 2011
Interview, Alan Viard, resident scholar, the American Enterprise Institute, June 27, 2011
Interview, Daniel Mitchell, senior fellow, the Cato Institute, June 27, 2011
Interview, Eileen Appelbaum, senior economist, the Center for Economic and Policy Research, June 27, 2011
Interview, Bill Frenzel, guest scholar, the Brookings Intitution, June 27, 2011
Posted at 5:11 PM on June 23, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(1 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
President Obama on Wednesday outlined his plans to pull troops out of Afghanistan.
Here's how Rep. Betty McCollum responded to Obama's proposal to bring home some of the 33,000 troops he sent there in 2009.
"It is time for the U.S. to bring our troops home and limit the more than $2 billion per week being spent on this war while we face a serious fiscal crisis at home," she said in a June 23, 2011 press release. "After 10 years of service and sacrifice from American troops and a $400 billion investment by U.S. taxpayer dollars, the people of Afghanistan need to take control of their destiny and demonstrate to the world they can stand on their own."
McCollum's right: The war is costing a lot of money.
The Evidence
About $113 billion will be spent on Afghanistan operations in fiscal year 2011, or, about $2.4 billion each week, according to a Congressional Research Services report.
The U.S. hasn't always spent that much money in Afghanistan. In fiscal year 2003, the U.S. spent $306 million. In 2009, when Obama sent in more troops, the costs soared. .
On the second part of her claim, McCollum's estimate is a bit low. The U.S. has spent around $444 billionon Afghanistan war, which began right after 9/11. That includes funding for war operations, diplomatic efforts and the medical care for war vets, according to the same CRS report.
The Verdict
McCollum's claim is right. She gets an accurate.
SOURCES
Rep. Betty McCollum, Congresswoman Betty McCollum Responds to President Obama's Plan to Withdraw U.S. Troops from Afghanistan, June 23, 2011
The White House, Remarks by the President on the Way Forward in Afghanistan, June 22, 2011
CNN, Obama announces Afghanistan troop withdrawal plan, June 22, 2011
The Congressional Research Service, The Cost of Iraq, Afghanistan, and Other
Global War on Terror Operations Since 9/11, by Amy Belasco, March 29, 2011
The Christian Science Monitor, Afghanistan troop drawdown: why Congress doesn't like it, by Gail Russell Chaddock, June 23, 2011
Interview, Maria Reppas, spokeswoman, Rep. Betty McCollum, June 23, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on June 22, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(4 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
As the state's political leaders stare down a government shutdown, Democratic Gov. Mark Dayton is repeating that his plan to raise taxes - a cornerstone of his budget proposal - would affect very few Minnesotans.
"[My plan] only raises taxes on the wealthiest 2 percent of Minnesotans and does not raise a single dollar of income taxes or any property taxes on the other 98 percent of Minnesotans," he said during a press conference in response to a new GOP plan.
Dayton's right that few people will feel the brunt of his tax plan.
The Evidence
Dayton's proposal would create a new 4th income tax bracket that would impose a 10.95 percent rate on single Minnesotans making more than $150,000, heads of household making more than $200,000, and joint filers making more than $250,000 annually - all after deductions.
According to the state revenue department, about 2 percent - or 45,440 of the state's roughly 2.4 million filers - would pay Dayton's new higher income tax rate.
Everyone else would see no change in their income taxes. And at this point, Dayton's plan doesn't alter state property taxes, nor does it cut city and county aid, which can lead to local property tax increases, so he can claim that his proposal won't increase property taxes, either.
But here's the part Dayton leaves out: his plan also expands and increases the sales tax on some products and services, including box seats and suites at sports stadiums, admissions to events such as car and home shows, and charges for digital video recording and satellite TV, among other things.
Dayton's plan also proposes increasing corporate taxes, which the revenue department predicts will trickle down to Minnesota residents.
All together, these new taxes would affect everyone, rich and poor. But the impact would be very small - less than a 1 percent increase for most consumers. For instance, if you make $85,000 annually, you're probably paying in the range of $1,300 in sales taxes every year. Dayton's plan would add an additional $8.50 to that.
The Verdict
For the most part, Dayton's plan doesn't weigh much on most Minnesotans. And while he doesn't mention that everyone will see a slight uptick in sales and corporate taxes under his plan, he is right that most Minnesotans would not see a property tax increase or an income tax increase as a result of his budget plan.
Dayton's claim gets an accurate.
SOURCES:
Gov. Mark Dayton, June 16, 2011, press conference
The Minnesota Revenue Department, Tax Incidence Study of the Governor's Tax Proposals, June 8, 2011
Minnesota Management and Budget, Supplemental Budget Update #1, March 21, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on June 17, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(8 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
As the state faces a government shutdown, Senate Republican Majority Leader Amy Koch has been pointing out that Dayton said he would never let it come to this.
"Gov. Dayton promised voters he would not shut down government," Koch said in a press release June 10, the day 36,000 state workers were sent lay off notices.
In fact, Dayton did say he would reject a government shutdown during the 2010 campaign.
The Evidence
Dayton and the Republican-controlled legislature are at an impasse over $1.8 billion in spending for the next biennium. Dayton wants to raise taxes on the wealthiest Minnesotans to expand the budget, but Republicans are not on board.
Both sides have offered concessions since Dayton vetoed the Republican's $34 billion budget in May. Dayton said he would trim his tax plan and support more spending cuts. Republicans are willing to shift $202 million in tax breaks to other programs. If they can't reach a deal by July 1, state government will shut down. This week Dayton filed a court petition laying out his plans for which agencies would remain open during a shutdown.
During a debate in late October 2010, KSTP-TV reporter Tom Hauser asked Dayton what he would do in a situation very similar to the one the state is facing now. Dayton, at that point in time, was proposing raising taxes on many more people to raise $4 billion in new revenue.
"If you can't get the tax increases that you want, and you can't get the Legislature to go along with the vision that you have, how far would you be willing to go," Hauser asked. "Would you allow government to shut down in order to try to get things the way you see them?"
"No, I would not shut government down," answered Dayton. "Government imparts important services to the people of Minnesota and those services need to continue - public safety, the education system and the like."
A bit later, Dayton seemed to back track, saying that he "would not compromise on the principle that we need to make taxes more progressive in Minnesota."
Dayton's spokeswoman Katharine Tinucci says the situation is very different now.
"The legislature failed to pass a budget that [Dayton] could sign, and he is now working every day to find compromise, so they can pass a budget he will sign into law," she wrote in an email.
The Verdict
Koch says that Dayton promised no government shutdown. While she fails to point out that he made this comment during the campaign -- long before the current stalemate -- he was responding to a question that described a situation very similar to the one the state is in now.
As a result, Koch's first PoliGraph test is accurate.
SOURCES
Sen. Amy Koch, Republican Legislative Leaders Comment on Layoff Notices Sent to 36,000 State Workers, June 10, 2011
C-SPAN, Minnesota gubernatorial debate, Oct. 24, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, Dayton revises budget offer, by Tom Scheck, May 16, 2011
Interview, Michael Brodkorb, spokesman, Sen. Amy Koch, June 16, 2011
Interview, Katharine Tinucci, spokeswoman, Gov. Mark Dayton, Jun
Posted at 2:00 PM on June 15, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: Bachmann fact check, PoliGraph
Rep. Michele Bachmann took part in her first presidential debate this week, and in addition to announcing she'll run for the White House, she made this statement about the new health care law.
"This is a job killer," she said. "The [Congressional Budget Office] has said that 'Obamacare' will kill 800,000 jobs."
Bachmann's claim contains some truth but leaves out some finer points that are worth exploring.
The Evidence
In August 2010, the CBO, Congress's nonpartisan number cruncher, released its Budget and Economic Outlook. It included an assessment of how the new health care law would affect the labor market. According to the report, provisions in the new law would reduce the amount of labor by about 0.5 percent.
That amounts to about 800,000 out of the 160 million projected workers in 2021, said CBO director Douglas Elmendorf in testimony on Capitol Hill in February.
But does that mean that the health care will "kill" 800,000 jobs? Not necessarily.
First, the CBO makes clear that, while some employers may choose to hire fewer people as the result of penalties brought about by the new law, the law "will reduce the amount of labor used in the economy...primarily by reducing the amount of labor that workers choose to supply."
However, a key assumption in the CBO analysis is that some people are only working to get benefits. And because the law offers new ways to get insurance that don't involve working, the CBO foresees two outcomes:
- Some people may opt to work less.
- Or, some people will leave their jobs and get coverage through Medicaid, which was expanded to include low-income, childless adults, or with government subsidies through the health care exchanges.
Medicaid benefits and health care exchange subsidies are only available to lower income earners, so the CBO predicts that the government assistance will effectively discourage some people from working to keep their income levels low.
The Verdict
Bachmann is correct that the CBO has predicted approximately 800,000 people won't work in 2021 as a result of the new health care law.
But she says those jobs will be "killed." In fact, the CBO assumes that many if those people may not want to work because they can get health coverage without having a job.
Without providing the full context around the number, Bachmann's statement is misleading.
SOURCES
Minnesota Public Radio News, GOP debate, June 13, 2011
The Congressional Budget Office, The Budget and Economic Outlook: An Update, August 2010
Politico, Health law to shrink workforce by 800,000, by J. Lester Feder and Kate Nocera, Feb. 10, 2011
CBO's Analysis of the Major Health Care Legislation Enacted in March 2010, Statement of Douglas Elmendorf, Director, Congressional Budget Office, March 30, 2011
PolitiFact, Adam Hasner cites CBO, says health care law cuts 800,000, by Aaron Sharockman, June 8, 2011
The Washington Post, Fact Checker: Playing games with CBO testimony on jobs and the health-care law, By Glenn Kessler, Feb. 11, 2011
Posted at 3:15 PM on June 10, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: Pawlenty fact check, PoliGraph
Republican presidential hopeful Tim Pawlenty recently laid out his plan to grow the economy, which relies heavily on tax and spending cuts.
"Cutting just 1 percent of overall federal spending for 6 consecutive years would balance the federal budget by 2017."
Pawlenty is right on the spending side of the equation. Cutting spending would help balance the budget. But his plan to cut taxes makes a balanced budget unlikely.
The Evidence
Pawlenty spokesman Alex Conant says cuts would be made starting with a "base year" and spending would be reduced 1 percent each year going forward. During that time, spending would be frozen.
In the current fiscal year, the nation spent about $3.6 trillion, according to the Congressional Budget Office (CBO). One percent of that is $36 billion, leaving a fiscal year 2012 budget of roughly 3.59 trillion.
If the 1 percent spending cuts continued, by 2017 total federal spending would be around $3.4 trillion - about $1.26 trillion less than what the federal government would spend without the cuts. Assuming the Congressional Budget Office's 2017 revenue projection of about $4.07 trillion is in the ballpark, the nation would have a surplus of about $670 billion.
The math works out, but it doesn't tell the whole story of Pawlenty's vision for the budget. Along with the 1 percent cuts, Pawlenty is proposing big tax cuts, which would make it much harder to balance the budget in the future.
Specifically, he wants to lower the corporate tax rate from 15 percent to 35 percent and create only two individual income tax rates of 10 percent for the first $50,000 of income and 25 percent for the rest. Further, he wants to ax the capital gains tax, interest income tax, dividends tax and the estate tax.
In his speech, Pawlenty suggested that 5 percent economic growth over the next 10 years and the elimination of tax loopholes would help offset the tax cuts. But many economists have said that the goal is unrealistic; 5 percent economic growth is difficult to achieve even in good years.
Based on current law and CBO growth projections, Pawlenty's plan could cost upwards of $11.6 trillion over the next 10 years, according to an analysis done by the Tax Policy Center.
In 2017, that could mean nearly $1.3 trillion in revenue lost to the federal budget, according to a separate analysis conducted by Michael Linden, director of budget and tax policy for the left-leaning Center for American Progress. If so that means the 1 percent cuts wouldn't balance the budget after all.
Furthermore, budget experts are quick to point out that, while 1 percent may seem small, Pawlenty's cuts would be difficult to achieve without cuts to Medicare, Social Security and military spending, which dominate federal spending and account for much of the nation's projected spending increases.
The Verdict
Pawlenty's claim is correct: cutting 1 percent of spending annually would balance the budget by 2017.
But that assumes no changes in the tax code, and that's an unlikely scenario. While it's difficult to say precisely how Pawlenty's tax changes will affect the nation's coffers, initial estimates show that it could result in significant revenue losses.
So, Pawlenty's claim that a 1 percent cut in federal spending would balance the budget is accurate - but only if the government does not enact the tax cuts he proposes. Otherwise, it is unlikely.
SOURCES
Tim Pawlenty, A Better Deal: Governor Tim Pawlenty's Economic Policy Remarks, June 7, 2011
The Congressional Budget Office, An Analysis of the President's Budgetary Proposals for Fiscal Year 2012, accessed June 9, 2011
The Congressional Budget Office, Budget Projections, January 2011
The Washington Post, Tim Pawlenty's Dubious Economic Assertions, June 8, 2011
The Washington Post, Pawlenty's magical economic plan, by Ruth Marcus, June 9, 2011
Interview, Alex Conant, spokesman, Gov. Tim Pawlenty, June 9, 2011
Interview, Michael Linden, Director of Tax and Budget Policy, The Center for American Progress, June 9, 2011
Interview, Gene Steuerle, the Urban Institute, June 9, 2011
Interview, Isabel Sawhill, The Brookings Institution, June 9, 2011
Interview, Eric Toder, the Urban Institute, June 10, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on June 8, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(4 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph, U.S. House
Tim Walz recently introduced a bill that would expand oil and gas production in the United States.
To build support for the legislation, Walz frequently points out that the nation spends big bucks daily on oil imports.
"America has talked about eliminating our dependence on foreign oil for decades, but we continue to spend too much time talking and too little time acting," he wrote in a May 31, 2011 op-ed in the Rochester Post-Bulletin. "Each day, we send $1 billion overseas that can't be used to invest in our own economy."
Walz gets this one right.
The Evidence
The price of oil fluctuates daily and so does the amount of oil the United States imports.
But using recent Energy Information Administration data, Walz's estimate is essentially correct.
For instance, in January, the United States imported about 11.9 barrels of oil daily for an average cost of $1.1 billion. In March, the country spent an average of $1.2 billion a day on oil imports.
In 2010, the cost was similar: Every day, the cost of oil imports was in the ballpark of $1 billion.
The Verdict
Walz is correct: the United States spends about $1 billion on oil imports daily.
SOURCES
The Rochester Post-Bulletin, It's time to unleash America's energy potential, May 31, 2011
Tim Walz, Bipartisan Energy Working Group Unveils Plan for Job Creation, Energy Independence, accessed June 7, 2011
U.S. Census Bureau, U.S. Bureau of Economic Analysis, May 2011
The Energy Information Administration, U.S. Imports by Country of Origin, accessed June 6, 2011
The Energy Information Administration, Crude Oil Prices, accessed June 6, 2011
The Energy Information Administration, Merchandise Trade Value, accessed June 6, 2011
The Truman National Security Project, Oil Addiction: Fueling Our Enemies, Feb. 17, 2010
Interview, Sara Severs, spokeswoman for Rep. Tim Walz, June 7, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on June 3, 2011
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: MN Legislature, PoliGraph
As Gov. Mark Dayton and GOP legislative leaders look for an overall budget deal, individual parts of the budget are causing partisan friction.
One area is education funding. DFL lawmakers say the Republican majority is cutting K-12 funding by $44 million. Republican leaders say they're increasing funding substantially.
"This bill spends $450 million more on education than last session," said Republican Rep. Pat Garofalo, who chairs the Education Finance Committee, during a debate over the issue with Rep. Mindy Greiling, the top DFLer on the committee, on the May 23, 2011 broadcast of Midday.
Education finance is complicated stuff, and so is Garofalo's claim.
The Evidence
Including $500 million in federal stimulus dollars and delayed payments of $1.9 billion to schools, the state spent about $13.812 billion on K-12 education in the last biennium. Republicans are proposing a $14.278 billion education budget, which is an increase of about $466 million over last session.
So, by that standard, Garofalo's claim is accurate: Republicans are proposing more spending compared to the last biennium.
But state law requires all sorts of automatic spending increases to compensate for higher student enrollment, growth in special education and other factors.
And that's where DFLers make their point. Though the Republican bill covers the bulk of those automatic spending increases, it's still about $44 million short of the $14.321 the state was projected to spend in the coming biennium. (For their part, Republicans argue their plan is only $15 million less because of a new provision that requires school districts to pay back state loans for new buildings.)
DFLers also point out that the GOP proposal means cuts for individual school districts, including the Minneapolis, Albert Lea and St. Cloud districts, and spending increases for others, including many of the state's charter schools.
This is partly because the current bill shifts money from one program to another. For instance, 18,000 more students will be enrolled in public schools over the next two years, and the bill increases per pupil spending from $20 to $21. But those new dollars are being funded by cuts to special education funding, according to Tom Melcher, the state's education finance director.
The Verdict
On one hand, Garofalo's claim is correct. His panel's bill would increase education spending compared to the last two years and increase spending on some things, including per pupil spending.
But he neglects a fact that DFLers highlight: funding falls short of what the state would be spending if it followed current law, and that means some school districts will see cuts.
For leaving out those facts, Garofalo's claim is misleading.
SOURCES
Minnesota Public Radio News, Midday, May 23, 2011
Gov. Mark Dayton, Letter to Rep. Kurt Zellers, May 24, 2011
Session Daily, House approves amended omnibus K-12 finance bill, by Kris Berggren, May 18, 2011
Minnesota House Fiscal Staff, General Fund Allocations - Projected FY 2012-13 Compared to FY 2010-11, March 2011
Minnesota House Fiscal Staff, Education Finance Committee: 2011 Session Appropriation Tracking, May 11, 2011
Interview, Rep. Pat Garofalo, May 31, 2011
Interview, Scott Russell, Policy Analyst, Minnesota Budget Project, June 1, 2011
Interview, Tim Strom, Legislative Analyst, Minnesota House of Representatives, June 1, 2011
Interview, Greg Crowe, Legislative Analyst, Minnesota House of Representatives, June 1, 2011
Interview, Tom Melcher, Program Finance Director, Minnesota Department of Education, June 2, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on June 1, 2011
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: PoliGraph, Tim Pawlenty
Less than a day after Republican Tim Pawlenty announced he's running for president, the Democratic National Committee (DNC) posted an ad that implies the former governor has no idea why he wants to be in the White House.
Toward the end of the ad, the question, "Why are you running?" flashes across the screen.
Pawlenty's answer:
"I don't know," and "I wish I had a better answer for you."
The ad takes Pawlenty's words out of context.
The Evidence
Citing a May 2011 Time magazine article, the ad claims even Pawlenty doesn't know why he's running for office.
But here's the rub: the author of that article asked Pawlenty when he started considering a run for president, not why.
"When I ask Pawlenty... exactly when he decided he was up to the grand challenge of the presidency, he answers in less than grandiose terms, explaining how he'd set up a political-action committee in 2009," wrote Time reporter Michael Crowley. "I try again, saying I am curious about when he first imagined himself worthy of the history books, ready to send soldiers to their deaths and endure the national stage's harsh toll. 'I don't know,' he replies. 'I wish I had a good answer for you on that.' "
Crowley wrote on May 23 that the DNC's ad was a "distortion" of his exchange with Pawlenty.
"Although our conversation touched on Pawlenty's rationale for running, my questions were after something different," Crowely wrote. "I was curious to know when Pawlenty, whose strength and weakness is his regular-guy persona, came to think of himself as presidential material."
The ad is meant to push Pawlenty to define his candidacy, says Alec Gerlach, DNC spokesman.
"Is he running as a tea party candidate, is he running as a moderate, or is he running on his record, which is abysmal?" Gerlach said.
The Verdict
The DNC twists Pawlenty's words, implying he doesn't know why he wants to run for president. Pawlenty said he didn't know when he started thinking of himself as presidential material.
The claim is misleading to the point of being false.
SOURCES
The Democratic National Committee, Ad: Why?, May 23, 2011
YouTube, Tim Pawlenty - A Time For Truth, May 22, 2011
Time Magazine, Pawlenty Makes GOP Bid Official: Is He Too Nice for His Own Good?, Michael Crowley, May
Time: Swampland, What Pawlenty Said, by Michael Crowely, May 23, 2011
Interview, Alec Gerlach, spokesman, Democratic National Committee, May 31, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on May 25, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: Pawlenty fact check, PoliGraph, Tim Pawlenty
There's a cardinal rule of presidential primary politics: don't knock ethanol in corn-state Iowa.
But that didn't stop former Gov. Tim Pawlenty from telling an audience there he'd phase-out ethanol subsidies if elected president.
"Even in Minnesota, when we faced fiscal challenges, we reduced ethanol subsidies," he said during his announcement Monday that he's running for president. "That's where we are now in Washington, but on a much, much larger scale."
Pawlenty cut state ethanol subsidies - but he left out that he also promised to pay them back later.
The Evidence
Minnesota ethanol producers have been enjoying subsidies since 1987. For a long time, they got 20 cents from the government for every gallon of fuel they produced. The subsidy was meant to jumpstart small, farmer-owned operations.
When Pawlenty took office in 2003, the state was facing a budget shortfall. Pawlenty cut $20 million in ethanol subsidies that year - roughly three-fourths of the $26.8 million in payments slated to go out - and followed-up with a plan to reduce the payments to 10 cents per gallon in the coming biennium.
Pawlenty's plan didn't fly with rural lawmakers. Ultimately, he and the Legislature agreed to draw down the subsidy to 13 cents per gallon through fiscal year 2007, and pay producers the difference later on. According to a Legislative Auditor's report, the state paid out $50.5 million in so-called deficiency payments during the last biennium.
Furthermore, the program was always slated to end in 2010, so the ethanol subsidies would have halted regardless of Pawlenty's actions (though deficiency payments are still trickling out.)
Though Pawlenty wanted to cut ethanol subsidies, he also pushed to expand the state's requirement that every gallon of gasoline be blended with 10 percent ethanol. In 2005, the state approved Pawlenty's plan to require gas be mixed with 20 percent ethanol by 2013, a government mandate that's bolstered the market for the corn-based fuel.
The Verdict
It is true Pawlenty cut Minnesota ethanol subsidies, but he glosses over the fact that ethanol producers eventually got their money anyway.
That's enough to make this claim misleading.
SOURCES
YouTube.com, Tim Pawlenty in Des Moines - 2012 Announcement Speech, May 23, 2011
Minnesota Public Radio News, Lawmakers resist Pawlenty's proposal to cut ethanol subsidies, January 16, 2003
Minnesota Public Radio News, Ethanol bill nears crucial test, by Laura McCallum, March 16, 2005
Minnesota Department of Energy, Gasoline Pricing Facts for Consumers, accessed May 25, 2011
Office of the Legislative Auditor, Biofuel Policies and Programs, April 2009
The Minneapolis Star Tribune, Cuts in the pipeline: Subsidies keep ethanol industry from fizzling, by Joy Powell, March 11, 2003
The St. Paul Pioneer Press, Session out but not over, by Patrick Sweeney and Bill Salisbury, May 20, 2003
Interview, Ralph Groschen, Senior Marketing Specialists, Minnesota Department of Agriculture, May 24, 2005
More
The Humphrey School
MPR News is hosting an online debate about ethanol. Find it here.
Posted at 2:00 PM on May 20, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: MN Legislature, PoliGraph
Minnesota House Speaker Kurt Zellers, R- Maple Grove, may have heard from some angry professors this week.
During a discussion about cuts to the state's higher education budget, Zellers said that college professors have seen their pay rise while other workers are getting paid less.
"It's... troubling when families have had a 30-or-40 percent pay cut and you see a college professor get a 20-or-30 percent increase in pay," he told Midday host Gary Eichten.
That's not correct. Most public school professors have seen pay cuts and salary freezes, not pay increases.
The Evidence
In 2009, faculty working for the Minnesota State Colleges and Universities system (MnSCU) agreed to a two-year pay freeze.
There were a few exceptions to this rule. Teachers at two-year schools could get a salary bump if they completed additional graduate work. Professors at MnSCU's universities received a 4.8 percent salary increase if they met career milestones. And university faculty promoted during the freeze earned more pay.
The University of Minnesota also tightened pay. During the most recent fiscal year, faculty salaries were cut by 1.15 percent. And in 2010, faculty salaries were frozen.
Daniel Wolter, spokesman for the U of M, says about 100 of the university's 4,100 faculty members at the Twin Cities campus were offered retention pay, which is given to teachers in particularly competitive fields who may be looking to leave the school. He said amounts of that pay vary based on the job and the type of research the professor is doing.
In a separate interview, Zellers said he misunderstood the headline of a 2009 MPR News story that focused on the $300,000 in bonuses paid to top MnSCU administrators, not faculty.
The Verdict
In some instances, college faculty saw pay increases in the last couple of years. But the majority of Minnesota's public school professors have been working under pay freezes and pay cuts.
Zellers' claim is false.
SOURCES
Minnesota Public Radio News, Midday, May 16, 2011
The University of Minnesota, Equity During Budget Cuts, March 31, 2011
Minnesota Public Radio News, MnSCU bonuses to top staffers nears $300K, by Tim Post, Sept. 17, 2009
Minnesota State University - Mankato, State university faculty, MnSCU system reach tentative salary accord, Feb. 23, 2009
Interview, Daniel Wolter, News Service Director, University of Minnesota, May 19, 2011
Interview, Melinda Voss, spokeswoman, Minnesota State Colleges and Universities, May 19, 2011
Interview, Russ Stanton, MnSCU Interfaculty Organization, May 20, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 2:00 PM on May 18, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(6 Comments)
Filed under: MPR in D.C., PoliGraph
The Legislature is weighing a controversial bill that would require voters to present a state-issued photo identification to vote.
Opponents say the proposal would block the state's elderly from casting ballots, as they are less likely to drive.
Among the opponents is Rep. Steve Simon, DFL - St. Louis Park, who frequently says that, "25 percent of seniors don't even have a photo ID."
That's the case in Wisconsin-- but not in Minnesota.
The Evidence
There's a lot of evidence that older people and minorities are less likely than the general population to have photo identification.
But to support their claim, opponents of the bill point to a 2005 Wisconsin study driver license data that found that only 25 percent of those over 65 have a driver's license or a photo ID.
That data is old and based on information from another state.
According to the Minnesota Department of Public Safety, about 10.5 percent of Minnesotans 65 and older do not have some form of photo identification. The figure is based on 2009 demographic data and is adjusted for annual mortality rates among the elderly.
The Verdict
Far more of Minnesota's oldest residents have photo identification than Simon contends. His claim is false.
SOURCES
Minnesota House of Representatives, Reps. Simon and Winkler Respond to Photo ID Demonstration, Jan. 26, 2011
The Driver License Status of the Voting Age Population in Wisconsin, by John Pawasarat, Employment and Training Institute, University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee, June 2005
Brennan Center for Justice, Citizens Without Proof: A Survey of Americans' Possession of Documentary Proof of Citizenships and Photo Identification, Nov. 2006
U.S. Census Bureau, American FactFinder, accessed May 10, 2011
Interview, Carrie Lucking, spokeswoman, House leadership, May 5, 2011
Interview, Patricia McCormack, Director of Driver Vehicle Services Division, Minnesota Department of Public Safety, May 13, 2011
Interview, Keesha Gaskins, Senior Counsel, Brennan Center for Justice, May 10, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on May 13, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: MN Legislature, PoliGraph
There was emotionally charged debate on the Minnesota Senate floor this week as legislators weighed a constitutional amendment to define marriage as a union between a man and woman.
In the end, the Republican-controlled Senate passed the bill largely along party lines. But Sen. Rep. Steve Simon, DFL-St. Louis Park, who opposed the measure, says public opinion on the issue is shifting.
"I predict that over the arch of time, we will have marriage equality," he said in an interview with Morning Edition's Cathy Wurzer on May 11, 2011. "I think that when you look at the poll numbers, particularly amongst young people, they're off the charts."
"Off the charts" is an overstatement, but national support for same-sex marriage is growing.
The Evidence
A recent ABCNews/Washington Post poll shows 53 percent support same-sex marriages. That's up from just 32 percent in 2004, representing a "dramatic, long-term shift in public attitudes" on the subject, according to the survey report. The Pew Research Center and CNN/Opinion Research Corporation also recently reported increasing support, though a Pew poll showed that opponents and proponents of gay marriage still evenly split.
Minnesota appears to follow the national trend. A Star Tribune poll released May 13, 2011, with a 4.7 percentage point margin of error shows that 55 percent of Minnesotans would oppose an amendment to ban gay marriage; in 2004, the same poll showed that 58 percent supported such an amendment.
On his FiveThirtyEight blog, statistics guru Nate Silver analyzed data on public opinion on same-sex marriage going back to 1988. His conclusion: the gap between supporters and opponents is narrowing. But while opponents are now in the minority, Silver wrote, "it is too soon to say with confidence that support for gay marriage has become the plurality position (let alone the majority one)."
So, support is on the rise, but it's not "off the charts" as Simon said.
Simon is correct that the majority of younger people tend to support same-sex marriage, and have for a while. For instance, the ABCNews/Washington Post poll showed that 68 percent of those younger than 29 support it. The Star Tribune poll found that 60 percent of those younger than 34 would oppose a constitutional amendment to ban gay marriage.
The Verdict
Simon's overall point is correct. Support for same sex marriage is growing, especially among younger people.
SOURCES
Minnesota Public Radio News, Morning Edition, May 11, 2011
ABCNews/Washington Post Poll:Gay Marriage, March 18, 2011
The Pew Research Center, Fewer Are Angry at Government, But Discontent Remains High, March 3, 2011
CNN/Opinion Research Corporation, Poll: April 19, 2011
PollingReport.com, Same-Sex Marriage, Gay Rights, accessed May 12, 2011
FiveThirtyEight, Gay Marriage Opponents Now in Minority, April 20, 2011
Pew Research Center, Support for Same Sex Marriage Edges Upward, Oct. 6, 2010
The Star Tribune, Minnesota Poll: Support falls for ban on gay marriage, by Rachel Stassen-Berger, May 13, 2011
The Star Tribune, Minnesota Poll: Majority oppose gay marriage ban, May 13, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 2:00 PM on May 12, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(3 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
Minnesota Republicans are aiming to put issues on the ballot in 2012 election, among them a constitutional amendment that would define marriage in Minnesota as only between a man and a woman.
"I know that 78 percent...of the people in Minnesota want this decision to be given to them on a ballot," said bill sponsor Warren Limmer, R-Maple Grove, during an April 26, 2011, press conference.
Limmer's numbers are coming from one poll commissioned by groups that support a statewide vote on the issue.
The Evidence
The Senate has approved the amendment, and the House is expected to. Same-sex marriage is already illegal in Minnesota, but Limmer and other supporters of the bill say that changing the state constitution is necessary to prevent the law from being overturned.
One recent poll backs Limmer's contention that a broad majority of the public wants the issue on the ballot, about 74 percent of Minnesota voters. (Limmer's spokeswoman Susan Closmore said that he incorporated the 4 percentage point margin of error when making the statement.)
But it's important to highlight where those numbers are coming from. The poll, which surveyed about 600 Minnesota voters Jan. 10-13, 2011, was commissioned by the Minnesota Family Council and the National Organization for Marriage, two organizations that support the amendment.
Furthermore, the company hired to conduct the poll, Lawrence Research, is operated by pollster Gary Lawrence, who, according to news reports in the Minnesota Independent and the Washington Post, organized members of the Mormon Church Mormons in support of Proposition 8, an amendment to the California Constitution that prevents gay marriage from being recognized by the state. Lawrence did not return calls to provide more details on his polling results.
So, Limmer is basing his claim on one poll commissioned by organizations that support putting a marriage amendment to a vote.
There's little current information for comparison, but polls done in 2009 and 2010 provide some context:
โข A 2009 KSTP/SurveyUSA poll found that only 52 percent of Minnesotans would support a statewide vote to ban gay marriage.
โข A 2010 Minnesota Public Radio News/Humphrey School of Public Affairs poll showed that 49 percent of Minnesotans oppose same-sex marriage.
โข A 2009 Star Tribune poll found that a third of Minnesotans would support a constitutional amendment banning same-sex marriages.
The Verdict
Limmer's claim is rooted in a survey commissioned by two groups that have a stake in the debate over same-sex marriages. Because there are no other current polls to compare Limmer's numbers to, this PoliGraph test rates an inconclusive.
SOURCES
TheUptake, Constitutional Amendment Defining Marriage Press Conferences, April 26, 2011
The Minnesota Family Council, Let the people vote on marriage!, by Chuck Darrell, April 14, 2011
The Star Tribune, Minnesota Poll: A Subtle shift on gay unions, by Mark Brunswick, May 1, 2009
Minnesota Public Radio News, Poll shows slight shift in gay marriage opinions, by Tim Pugmire, Sept. 28, 2006
Results of KSTP/SurveyUSA Poll, May 11, 2009
Minnesota Public Radio News, MPR-Humphrey Poll: Obama could struggle in MN in 2012, by Mark Zdechlik, Sept. 30, 2010
Smart Politics, How Supportive Are Minnesotans of Gay Rights?, by Eric Ostermeier, Oct. 11, 2009
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 2:00 PM on May 6, 2011
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: Pawlenty fact check, PoliGraph, Tim Pawlenty
During the first Republican presidential debate of the 2012 campaign, former Gov. Tim Pawlenty reminded viewers that President Barack Obama was against a requirement that everyone buy health insurance before he was for it.
Just a few years ago, Obama "promised the nation he would do health care reform focused on cost containment, he opposed the individual mandate," Pawlenty said on
May 5, 2011.
Pawlenty got this one right.
The Evidence
While campaigning for the White House, then-Sen. Barack Obama wanted everyone in the country to have health care - he just didn't want to require people to buy it.
In fact, Obama and former Sen. Hillary Clinton frequently traded barbs over the issue: Clinton highlighted the so-called individual mandate in her plan, claiming her strategy would cover more Americans than Obama's would. Obama would counter that not everyone could afford health insurance.
"If a mandate was the solution, we could try that to solve homelessness by mandating everybody buy a house," he told CNN in 2008. "The reason they don't have a house is because they don't have the money."
In 2009, just as debate over the health care bill was starting to heat up, a CBS News interviewer asked Obama, "Do you believe that each individual American should be required to have health insurance?"
"I have come to that conclusion," Obama responded. "During the campaign I was opposed to this idea because my general attitude was the reason people don't have health insurance is not because they don't want it, it's because they can't afford it."
Ultimately, the individual mandate became a focal point in the health care debate. The final law requires that everyone have health insurance by 2014. Those who don't will pay a fine.
The Verdict
It's true that Obama once opposed the individual mandate. Pawlenty's claim is accurate.
SOURCES
Fox News, Republican Presidential Debate, May 5, 2011
PolitiFact.com, Obama flip-flops on requiring people to buy health care, by Angie Drobnic Holan, July 20, 2009
FactCheck.org, They've Got You Covered?, by Lori Robertson and Jess Henig, February 14, 2008
CBS News, The Future of Health Care Reform, July 15, 2009
The New York Times, transcript of the Democratic debate in South Carolina, Jan. 21, 2008
The Cato Institute, Obama Flip-Flops on the Individual Mandate (Again), by Michael Cannon, July 19, 2010
The Kaiser Family Foundation, Summary of Coverage Provisions in the Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act, April 14, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 2:00 PM on May 4, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(3 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph, U.S. House
U.S. Rep. Paul Ryan's budget proposal includes a big change to Medicare. Most notably, the Republican chairman of the House Budget Committee aims to convert the program into a system that offers what he calls "premium support," which his detractors call vouchers. Among those defending Ryan's proposal is Rep. Chip Cravaack of Minnesota.
"The [new Medicare] benefits being proposed is what I receive in Congress right now," Cravaack assured listeners of April 14, 2011, Midmorning broadcast.
On the surface, there are similarities between the two plans. Look deeper, and the differences are stark.
The Evidence
Currently, the government pays doctors and hospitals for treating Medicare patients, though some beneficiaries also pay premiums and other costs.
The Ryan plan would change all that for those who are younger than 55. Starting in 2022, the government would provide beneficiaries with a payment, which they would use to buy insurance that meets standards set out by the Office of Personnel Management (OPM), a branch of government that also sets standards for federal employee coverage. Just as federal employees do, Medicare beneficiaries would be able to choose a private plan from an array of choices.
That's where similarities between the plans end.
The federal employee plan isn't much different from private sector employee-sponsored coverage: the federal government - or the "employer" - pays roughly 75 percent of premium costs, and federal employees pick up the remainder.
That ratio is commonly called the "Fair Share" formula because even if health care costs rise, the federal government is required by law to pick up the bulk of the tab.
Ryan proposes to link Medicare payments to the consumer price index, which has lagged behind increases in the cost of medical care. Over time, the payments Ryan is proposing would buy less coverage as a result, potentially making it difficult to purchase plans similar to those enjoyed by federal employees.
In fact, the Congressional Budget Office predicts that, under the Ryan plan, by 2030, the average 65-year-old beneficiary would be paying 68 percent of his or her benefits compared to 25 percent under current law.
It's also worth pointing out that no detail has been given on how OPM would structure these plans and what sort of benefits insurance providers would be required to include. So, it's impossible to say whether Medicare coverage would be like coverage Cravaack gets.
The Verdict
There's a nugget of truth in Cravaack's claim: the Republican plan envisions that Medicare and federal employee benefits would have to meet standards set by the same branch of government, and that both groups would get to choose from an array of private plans.
But Cravaack's statement that the GOP Medicare proposal is "what I receive in Congress right now" is misleading to the point of being false because the government is guaranteed to cover 75 percent of his premium costs, regardless of how expensive health care gets. That's not the case for the new Medicare plan proposed by the GOP; in fact, it is likely beneficiaries will end up paying far more than they do now.
SOURCES
Minnesota Public Radio News, Midmorning, April 14, 2011
The Path to Prosperity: Restoring America's Promise, accessed May 3, 2011
The Congressional Budget Office, Letter to Paul Ryan regarding proposed changes to Medicare and Medicaid, April 5, 2011
The New York Times, Comparing Ryan's Medicare Plan to What Congress Gets, by Uwe E. Reinhardt, April 18, 2011
The Congressional Research Services, Health Benefits for Members of Congress, by Barbara English, Sept. 25, 2007
The U.S. Office of Personnel Management, Federal Employees Health Benefits Program Handbook, accessed May 3, 2011
The Commonwealth Fund, Stark Choices: The Health Care Budget Proposals from the President and the House of Representatives, April 29, 2011, by Karen Davis
PolitiFact.com, Mike Pence said the Republican Medicare proposal will allow seniors to buy the same kind of health care as Congress, by Angie Drobnic Holan, April 13, 2011
The Washington Post, Fact Checker: GOP Medicare plan 'just like' Congress's coverage?, by Glenn Kessler, April 30, 2011
Interview, Shawn Ryan, spokesman, Rep. Chip Cravaack, May 2, 2011
Interview, Jack Hoadley, Georgetown University Health Policy Institute, May 3, 2011
Interview, Stuart Guterman, Vice President for Payment and System Reform, the Commonwealth Fund, May 3, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 2:00 PM on April 29, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(6 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
Before former Gov. Tim Pawlenty arrived in Boston, Mass., a few weeks ago to speak at a tea party rally, Minneapolis Mayor R.T. Rybak gave his take on the former governor's record.
"The facts are this: Under Tim Pawlenty, the average tax rates went up for the bottom 90 percent... of Minnesotans. The richest 10 percent had their average taxes go down," Rybak said during an April 14, 2010, conference call with Boston reporters. "So if the Tea Party wants to represent the top 10 percent of the country and raise 90 percent of the people's taxes, they'll love Tim Pawlenty."
There's truth to Rybak's claim, but he leaves out an important detail.
The Evidence
Rybak is talking about the effective tax rate, which is the ratio of taxes to income.
Generally speaking, he's correct. Between 2002, the year before Pawlenty took office, and 2008, the wealthiest Minnesotans - the top 10 percent - saw their effective state and local sales tax rate decline slightly. Meanwhile, lower earners generally saw their rates increase slightly.
And Pawlenty's policies played a role in that shift. For example, he supported cuts to Local Government Aid, which prompted some local governments to raise property taxes for many Minnesotans. That increase largely hit middle-and-lower income earners, according to the Minnesota Department of Revenue. A new cigarette fee backed by Pawlenty also changed effective tax rates.
But something else happened during Pawlenty's time in office: The richest Minnesotans got richer, in part due to unusually high capital gains income. So, while taxes may have increased for everyone in the state, in terms of percent of income, those changes were less dramatic for the state's wealthiest.
The Verdict
Rybak is correct that effective tax rates went up a bit for lower earners, and down slightly for higher earners. These changes have to do with how much money Minnesota's wealthiest made during Pawlenty's tenure, but they were also affected by changes in tax policy.
Though Rybak didn't provide all the details in his conference call, his claim is close enough to be accurate.
SOURCES
Minnesota Department of Revenue, 2011 Tax Incidence Study, March 2011
Interview, John Stiles, spokesman, R.T. Rybak, April 28, 2011
Interview, Aaron Twait, Research Director, Minnesota Taxpayers Association, April 28, 2011
Interview, Paul Wilson, Director of Tax Research, Minnesota Department of Revenue, April 29, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 3:00 PM on April 27, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(5 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
Recently, DFL Sen. Amy Klobuchar teamed up with Agriculture Secretary Tom Vilsack and Gov. Mark Dayton to talk about alternative fuels.
"We are making almost as much biofuels now as we import oil from Canada," Klobuchar said during an April 20, 2011 news conference.
Klobuchar got this one wrong. The United States imports a lot more oil than the biofuel it produces.
The Evidence
The most recent annual data on oil imports and ethanol production is from 2010. According to the Energy Information Administration, U.S. companies produced a daily average of 883,000 barrels of ethanol and biodiesel combined. Meanwhile, the nation imported an average of 1.88 million barrels of oil from Canada.
So, Canadian oil imports are almost twice the amount of biofuel we produce.
Klobuchar based her calculation on the actual gasoline produced from oil imported from Canada, says spokesman Linden Zakula. Generally speaking, a 42 gallon barrel of oil makes about 20 gallons of gasoline. "In the future she looks forward to using the more exact term," Zakula said.
Among other sources, Klobuchar's staff points to a report put together by Growth Energy, a Washington, D.C.-based group that represents ethanol producers, which shows that in 2009, the U.S. made about 750,000 barrels of ethanol daily and imported a little over 1 million barrels of gasoline from Canada.
But even then, energy experts point out that a gallon of ethanol doesn't contain as much energy as a gallon of gasoline. They say comparisons among fuels are more accurate when they're based on energy content.
The Verdict
Klobuchar said that we make nearly as much biofuel as we import oil from Canada. In fact, the U.S. imports about twice as much Canadian oil as domestically produced alternatives.
Her claim is false.
SOURCES
YouTube, Sen. Amy Klobuchar, Agriculture Secretary Tom Vilsack on biofuels, April 20, 2011
Minnesota Public Radio News, USDA chief discusses renewable energy in Minn., by Tom Scheck, April 20, 2011
The Energy Information Administration, Fuel Ethanol Overview, March 2011
The Energy Information Administration, Biodiesel Overview, March 2011
The Energy Information Administration, Monthly U.S. Net Imports from Canada of Crude Oil (Thousands of Barrels per Day), accessed April 27, 2011
The Energy Information Administration, Biofuels in the U.S. Transportation Sector, February 2007
The Energy Information Administration, Crude Oil and Total Petroleum Imports Top 15 Countries, March 30, 2011
Growth Energy, Ethanol: America's Growth Energy, accessed April 26, 2011
U.S. Department of Energy, Gasoline Gallon Equivalent (GGE) Definition, accessed April 26, 2011
Interview, Linden Zakula, spokesman, Sen. Amy Klobuchar, April 26, 2011
Interview, Chris Thorne, spokesman, Growth Energy, April 26, 2011
Interview, Steven G. Grape, U.S. Energy Information Administration, Office of Oil, Gas, and Coal Supply Statistics, April 26, 2011
Interview, Elizabeth Wilson, Associate Professor of Energy and Environmental Policy and Law at the Humphrey School of Public Affairs, April 26, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 2:00 PM on April 22, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(5 Comments)
Filed under: Pawlenty fact check, PoliGraph, Tim Pawlenty
On the campaign trail, former Gov. Tim Pawlenty likes to tout Q Comp, a program that pays teachers more when their students perform well.
"We were the first state to go statewide in the country to have performance pay for teachers to pay them other than just on seniority but on performance," Pawlenty said in a speech in Iowa last month.
Pawlenty's claim needs a lot of context.
The Evidence
Q Comp is a voluntary program that the state approved in 2005. Any school district in the state can apply, but must meet five criteria to be accepted. Among those requirements are regular teacher evaluations, teacher skill development, and school and classroom-wide performance standards; there's a lot of flexibility in what standards or goals schools choose.
To get paid more, teachers must meet those standards.
Minnesota wasn't the first to adopt a plan that pays teachers based on performance as Pawlenty said, though it's fair to say that the state has been among the earlier adopters.
According to Vanderbilt University's National Center on Performance Incentives, which keeps a database of all current federal, state and local programs, Arizona launched a statewide form of merit pay in the 1980s that allowed teachers to advance in salary if they gained new teaching skills and their students did better in class. No new funding has been approved since the mid-90s, but the program still serves a handful of Arizona school districts that enrolled early on. In 2000, the state approved an education sales tax to fund district pay-for-performance plans.
Meanwhile, North Carolina has been giving high-performing teachers annual bonuses since 1996 as part of a statewide program to improve school performance, though funding for those bonuses has been frozen for the last three years.
Pawlenty also said that the program is statewide. It's a phrase Pawlenty uses to distinguish Q Comp from regional or local programs in other states, said his spokesman Alex Conant. While it's true the program is available across the state, it's important to point out that only 50 school districts - or about 15 percent of the state's 339 districts - are participating in the 2010-2011 school year. Roughly 40 percent of the state's charter schools are involved.
The Verdict
Pawlenty walks a fine-line with this claim. Minnesota wasn't the very first state to adopt a statewide merit pay program, but it was one of the earlier adopters. Furthermore, Pawlenty's distinction that the program is statewide can be confusing to those listening to his speeches. It's available statewide, but only a fraction of schools are enrolled.
For both those reasons, Pawlenty's claim is misleading.
SOURCES
Tim Pawlenty's speech at the Iowa Faith and Freedom Coalition, March 7, 2011
Minnesota Department of Education, Quality Compensation for Teachers (Q Comp), accessed April 21, 2011
Minnesota Office of the Revisor of Statutes, 122A.414 Alternative Teacher Pay, accessed April 21, 2011
Office of the Legislative Auditor, State of Minnesota, Q Comp: Quality Compensation for Teachers, Feb. 2009
The Minnesota Secretary of State, School Districts in Minnesota, accessed April 21, 2011
The ABCs of Public Education: 2009-10 Growth and Performance of North Carolina Public Schools Executive Summary, October 14, 2010
National Center on Performance Incentives, State-By-State Resources, accessed April 21, 2011
National Center on Performance Incentives, Arizona State Incentives, accessed April 21, 2011
Education Commission of the States, Pay for Performance Proposals in Race to the Top Round II Applications, By Stephanie Rose, July 20, 2010
Education Commission of the States, Classroom Site Fund (CSF), accessed April 21, 2011
Arizona Department of Education, Career Ladder, accessed April 21, 2011
Education Commission of the States, Teaching Quality--Compensation and Diversified Pay--Pay-for-Performance, accessed April 21, 2011
Interview, Steve Dibb, Acting Director, Q Comp, Minnesota Department of Education
Interview, Student Performance Improvement Program Coordinator, Independent School District 15-St. Francis, April 21, 2011
Interview, Susan Burns, program manager, National Center on Performance Incentives, April 21, 2011
Interview, Kathy Christie, Chief of Staff, Education Commission of the States, April 21, 2011
Posted at 2:00 PM on April 20, 2011
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: MN Legislature, PoliGraph
During a recent House Tax Committee hearing, Rep. Steve Gottwalt, R-St. Cloud, made an oft-repeated claim about Gov. Mark Dayton's budget.
"The governor's proposal expands state government," he said on April 13, 2011. "It expands state government 22 percent."
Gottwalt isn't telling the whole story of the state's finances.
The Evidence
In the current biennium, the state expected to spend about $30.2 billion from the general fund, the state's primary pot of money. Dayton says he wants to spend about $37.3 billion in the upcoming biennium.
That's about a 23.5 percent increase in spending. So, on one hand, Gottwalt's claim is within range.
However, Gottwalt sidesteps two important facts: In the current biennium, Minnesota received $2.3 billion in federal stimulus money to stabilize the state's budget and help pay for Medicaid. And to balance the budget, the state agreed to put off paying schools an additional $1.9 billion. Despite the delay, the state has told schools to continue spending normally by tapping reserves or using credit.
According to the Minnesota House Fiscal Staff, those actions allowed the state to pay for about $4.2 billion more than the general fund would support in the current biennium, essentially bringing general fund spending to $34.4 billion.
Factor in federal dollars and the school payment shifts, and Dayton is proposing only an 8.4 percent spending increase.
The Verdict
In the current biennium, it looks like the state will spend about $30.2 billion. But that number is artificially low because of one-time federal stimulus dollars and a school payment shift.
As a result, Gottwalt's claim is misleading.
SOURCES
Minnesota House Fiscal Staff, General Fund Spending Increase: FY 2010-11 to FY 2010-13, March 2011
Minnesota Management and Budget, Gov. Mark Dayton's FY 2012-13 Biennial Budget, Feb. 12, 2011
Minnesota Management and Budget, General Fund: Fund Balance Analysis, Governor's Revised Recommendations, March 16, 2011
Minnesota Management and Budget, February 2011 Budget Forecast, accessed April 19, 2011
Interview, Rep. Steve Gottwalt, April 19, 2011
Interview, Bill Marx, Chief Fiscal Analysis, Minnesota House of Representatives, April 19, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 2:00 PM on April 15, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph, U.S. House
U.S. Rep. Collin Peterson says the House Agriculture Committee is taking a disproportionate hit under GOP Rep. Paul Ryan's proposed budget plan.
"Overall, we're talking about a 25 percent cut for [the Agriculture Committee], and we're not seeing 25 percent cuts to other parts of the budget bill," the 7th District Democrat told the Fergus Falls Daily Journal on April 12, 2011.
The Agriculture Committee, which Peterson serves on, could see big budget cuts, but it isn't the only one.
The Evidence
The Ryan proposal outlines future spending for 16 House committees. Six of them, including Armed Services, which is slated to get $1.7 trillion over 10 years and Foreign Affairs, which is expected to get $242 billion over 10 years, would see no budget cuts.
The remaining 10 committees would see billions slashed from their allowances, including the Agriculture Committee. Under current law, Peterson's panel is expected to get about $760 billion over the next 10 years. If Ryan's budget is adopted, that figure would be reduced to about $585 billion - about a 25 percent reduction in the panel's budget authority.
Those cuts include a $30 billion reduction in farm subsidies and a $127 billion reduction in spending on food stamps.
But Peterson is incorrect when he implies that other committees aren't seeing 25 percent cuts. For instance, the Education and Workforce Committee will see a more than 250 percent cut in its budget authority. The Homeland Security Committee will see an 88 percent cut in its budget authority. And the Energy and Commerce Committee, which has jurisdiction over health programs including Medicare, would see a 30 percent reduction in its pool of cash.
It's worth noting that the committees that would see the largest percentage cuts would produce the smallest savings. For instance, cutting the Homeland Security's budget will only save the government $16.6 billion compared to the $177 billion Ryan wants to pull from the farm committee's pockets.
Still, even when it comes to dollar amounts, the Agriculture Committee comes in a distant third compared to the Energy and Commerce and Ways and Means committees, which would both see about $1.3 trillion in cuts over the next decade.
The Verdict
Peterson correctly points out that his committee would see a 25 percent reduction in spending if the Ryan budget is passed. That's a lot of money, but Peterson misleads people when he contends that other committees aren't in the same boat. In terms of percentages and dollar amounts, other panels would see bigger cuts.
SOURCES
The Fergus Falls Daily Journal, Peterson: Ag subsidy cuts excessive, by Tom Hintgen, April 12, 2011
The House of Representatives Budget Committee, Concurrent Resolution on the Budget - Fiscal Year 2012, accessed April 14, 2011
Congressional Research Service, Reductions in Mandatory Agriculture Spending, Jim
Monke and Megan Stubbs, May 19, 2010
Interview, Liz Friedlander, spokeswoman, House Agriculture Committee, April 14, 2011
Interview, Brian Riedl, The Heritage Foundation, April 14, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 2:00 PM on April 13, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(1 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
DFL U.S. Rep. Keith Ellison isn't too happy about a deal to keep the government funded through September.
In an April 11, 2011 interview on MPR News, Ellison said that the 11th-hour compromise relies too much on spending cuts and not enough on revenue.
"The problem is not that we need to cut, cut, cut, the problem is that we have two-thirds of all American corporations that don't pay any taxes," he said.
Ellison is on solid ground with his claim.
The Evidence
Ellison points to a 2008 Government Accountability Office report to support his claim. The study, which looked at corporate income taxes paid between 1998 and 2005, appears to be the most recent analysis of the issue.
According to the report, about 66 percent of all United States corporations didn't pay any income tax in 2005, the last year included in the study. That percentage didn't change much between 1998 and 2004. It's important to point out that only 3 percent of all the firms reported no income taxes in every year examined in the study.
There are plenty of reasons why a business doesn't report corporate income tax. For instance, some may have had an operating loss in previous years, and newer operations may not be making enough to be taxed.
The Verdict
Ellison is correct: based on the most recent data, roughly two-thirds of all U.S. corporations don't pay income taxes.
SOURCES
Minnesota Public Radio News, Midmorning, April 11, 2011
The Government Accountability Office, Comparison of the Reported Tax Liabilities of Foreign- and U.S.-Controlled Corporations, 1998-2005, July 2008
Associated Press, Most Companies Pay No Federal Income Tax, Aug. 12, 2008
Tax Policy Center, Boring Report Prompts Sensational Claims on Corporate Tax Avoidance, by Eric Toder, Aug. 20, 2008
Interview, Micah Clemens, spokesman, Rep. Keith Ellison, April 11, 2011
Interview, James White, Government Accountability Office, April 12, 2011
Interview, Eric Toder, Urban Institute, April 12, 2011
Interview, Alan Viard, American Enterprise Institute, April 12, 2011
Interview, Chuck Marr, the Center for Budget and Policy Priorities, April 12, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 2:00 PM on April 8, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(1 Comments)
Filed under: MN Legislature, PoliGraph
Minnesota House Minority Leader Paul Thissen says Republican budget plans put jobs at risk.
"Last week, the House Higher Ed budget put 1,200 employees at Minnesota's colleges and universities on notice" he wrote in an April 5, 2010, press release. "The tax bill will slash another 1,700 jobs in counties and cities across Minnesota... With [the state government jobs] bill, the Republican Majority not only hands out an additional 754 pink slips, but also slashes support for private sector job creation."
Thissen, DFL-Minneapolis, is right that cutting government spending would cost jobs, but his numbers are hard to pin down.
The Evidence
The House version of higher education funding bill would cut about 17.7 percent from the University of Minnesota's budget and mandate a tuition cap of up to 5 percent. That could mean the loss of 600 to 700 jobs, said Richard Pfutzenreuter who is the Treasurer for the University of Minnesota.
But he points out that those numbers include employees who will retire early and jobs that will remain vacant. Only a fraction will be layoffs, he said. Further, it's unlikely the university would balance its budget only by cutting jobs, he said. Rather, it will be a mix of trims.
Meanwhile, the Minnesota State Colleges and Universities (MnSCU) budget would be cut nearly 16 percent. As a result, the system is looking at either 554 staff reductions or 490 faculty reductions, including retirements and unfilled positions. That's about 3 percent of the system's 19,300 person workforce, according to spokeswoman Melinda Voss.
All told, that's about 1,200 jobs. But Thissen's figure is on the high end because it's unlikely all cuts would come from layoffs. And those figures include retirements and unfilled positions as well.
Thissen points to an estimate from Gov. Mark Dayton's office to support the second part of this claim that the House tax bill will result in 1,700 job losses. The bill cuts state aid to communities, which must be made up through property tax increases or by cutting spending and jobs.
Finally, Thissen underestimates the number of jobs lost as the result of the state government funding bill. That legislation requires a 15 percent across the board cut of all state executive branch employees by 2015, which translates to about 4,900 jobs - not 754 jobs as he states. Those jobs can be cut through layoffs, retirements or hiring freezes.
The Verdict
Thissen's numbers are based on fact, but he leaves out some important points. For instance, he doesn't mention that it's unlikely that the University of Minnesota will cut only jobs to save money, nor does he point out that employment reductions would be made through retirements and hiring freezes, not just layoffs. And his claim on the tax bill relies on just one source--Gov. Mark Dayton.
Given all these caveats, it was a tough call. But overall, Thissen is correct that the spending bills being debated in the House would likely mean government job losses throughout the state.
SOURCES
Rep. Paul Thissen, Laying Waste to the Job Creation Foundation: Statement from Minority Leader Paul Thissen on House Pink Slip Bill, April 5, 2011
Minnesota House of Representatives, Summary: Higher Education Omnibus Appropriations, March 30, 2011
Facts about the Minnesota State Colleges and Universities system, accessed April 7, 2011
Legislative Testimony by President Robert H. Bruininks, Minnesota House Higher Education Committee, Tuesday, Feb. 22, 2011
On Campus, Why do college officials use dire but impossible budget scenarios, By Alex Friedrich, February 25, 2011
Minnesota House of Representatives, State Government Finance Omnibus Bill, accessed April 7, 2011
Minnesota Management and Budget, Workforce Report 2010, accessed April 7, 2011
Minnesota House of Representatives, Tax Omnibus Bill, accessed April 7, 2011
Interview, Carrie Lucking, spokeswoman, Rep. Paul Thissen, April 7, 2011
Interview, Richard Pfutzenreuter, Treasurer, University of Minnesota Board of Regents, April 7, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 1:00 PM on April 6, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(8 Comments)
Filed under: Bachmann fact check, Michele Bachmann, PoliGraph
Congress has until the end of the week to broker a deal to fund the government through September. If they don't, some lawmakers warn that governmental activities will come to a halt.
But U.S. Rep. Michele Bachmann says that a government shutdown is "actually a slowdown."
"About one-fourth of the federal workforce would be furloughed. Three-fourths of the federal workforce would stay in place, Social Security checks would continue to go out, the military would continue to be paid, and all essential services" would remain active, said Bachmann she said during a March 31, 2010 interview with reporters.
Bachmann's claim is correct.
The Evidence
Republicans and Democrats are at an impasse over how much to cut spending. If Congress fails to approve funding this week, the government is legally required to shutdown.
But that doesn't mean Washington will go dark.
President Barack Obama and members of Congress would stay. And a White House official confirmed that military personnel would be retained and continue to earn money, but they wouldn't be paid until funding is approved. Jobs that protect life or property, such as law enforcement officials, would also be exempted.
The White House also confirmed that roughly 800,000 workers would be furloughed. According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, the federal government employs roughly 2.8 million civilians, so that means roughly 28 percent would be temporarily out of work. Bachmann's estimate is in range.
Social Security checks will continue to go out, so on that point, Bachmann is also correct.
But approval of Small Business Administration loans would be put on hold, national parks and museums would be closed, and at the height of tax season, the Internal Revenue Service will stop processing paper returns.
The Verdict
Bachmann is correct that a shutdown is more like a slowdown.
SOURCES
Rep. Michele Bachmann, speaking with reporters on March 31, 2011
Congressional Research Service, Shutdown of the Federal Government: Causes, Processes, and Effects, Clinton T. Brass, Feb. 18, 2011
The U.S. Constitution, Article 1; Section 9, accessed April 4, 2011
The Office of Management and Budget, Sec. 124 - Agency Operations in the Absence of Appropriations, accessed April 4, 2011
The House of Representatives Committee on Government Reform and Oversight, Government Shutdown I: What's Essential, Dec. 6 and 14, 1995
The Bureau of Labor Statistics, number of federal employees 1995-1996, accessed April 4, 2011
The Social Security Administration, History of the SSA 1993-2000, accessed April 4, 2011
Reuters, Factbox: What happens in a U.S. government shutdown?, Feb. 28, 2011
The Christian Science Monitor, If a government shutdown occurs, what actually happens?, by Gail Russell Chaddock, Feb. 23, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 1:55 PM on April 1, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(1 Comments)
Filed under: Pawlenty fact check, PoliGraph, Tim Pawlenty
Once upon a time, former Gov. Tim Pawlenty supported a cap-and-trade plan to lower greenhouse gas emissions. Cap-and-trade sets an overall limit on pollution and lets businesses bid for the right to continue emissions.
Now, Pawlenty says his support for cap-and-trade was "a mistake." But he's also pointed out that he's not the only potential Republican candidate who has a mixed record on the issue.
"Everybody in the race - at least the big names in the race - embraced climate change or cap-and-trade at one point or another," he said on the March 28, 2011, episode of the Laura Ingraham radio show. "Every one of us."
Not every GOP hopeful has tried to tackle climate change, but many of them did.
The Evidence
Pawlenty's spokesman did not respond to questions about who the "big names in the race" are, but it's clear that a number of Republicans who are frequently mentioned as potential candidates have changed their position on climate change.
โข Sarah Palin: As governor of Alaska, Palin formed a subcabinet to tackle climate change, and she became involved in the Western Climate Initiative, a group with the goal of lowering greenhouse gas emissions. She also supported capping emissions as Sen. John McCain's running mate in the 2008 presidential election. But just months after McCain lost, she wrote in an op-ed that President Barack Obama's cap-and-trade plan was a "threat to our economy."
โข Newt Gingrich: In 2007, the former House Speaker said that "mandatory carbon caps combined with a trading system" is something he would "strongly support," and in 2008, he made an ad with Rep. Nancy Pelosi saying that the country, "must take action to address climate change." Since then, Gingrich has blasted legislation to cap emissions.
โข Mitt Romney: As Massachusetts governor, Romney first supported a regional plan to curb greenhouse gas emissions, but ultimately backed-off because he feared it would be too expensive for consumers. More recently, he's said that cap-and-trade would have a "devastating impact" on the economy.
โข Mike Huckabee: The former Arkansas governor has also sent mixed messages about his stance on climate change.
Still, there are three potential candidates in the field who have not changed their position on climate change.
Former Utah Gov. Jon Huntsman has been a leading GOP advocate for climate action, setting a goal to bring Utah's emissions down to 2005 levels by 2020. So far, it appears he's not wavered on the issue.
Meanwhile, it appears former Mississippi Gov. Haley Barbour, who once lobbied for energy companies, and U.S. Rep. Michele Bachmann have never flirted with the idea of supporting cap-and-trade.
The Verdict
Minus Barbour and Bachmann, Pawlenty is right that most potential GOP candidates have "embraced climate change or cap-and-trade at one point or another."
Pawlenty isn't precise on this one, and it's also tough to say just who is and who isn't a big name in the race right now. He's close enough that his claim passes the PoliGraph test.
SOURCES
YouTube, The Laura Ingraham Show, March 28, 2011
Minnesota Public Radio, Pawlenty, Doyle and other Midwest governors sign on to global warming pact, by Stephanie Hemphill, Nov. 15, 2011
Minnesota Public Radio, Pawlenty's current climate change stance differs from past , by Tom Scheck, Sept. 23, 2009
PolitiFact.com, Palin flips on her support of cap-and-trade, by Catharine Richert, July 20, 2009
The Washington Post, The 'Cap And Tax' Dead End , by Gov. Sarah Palin, July 14, 2009
Time.com, On Global Warming, No Clear Skies For Most 2012 GOP Contenders, by Michael Scherer, March 24, 2011
YouTube, Nancy Pelosi and Newt Gingrich Commercial on Climate Change, accessed March 31, 2011
Frontline, Interview with Newt Gingrich, February 15, 2007
Atlanta Journal Constitution, Newt Gingrich: Cap-and-trade is 'an energy tax' and a job-killer, by Jim Galloway, April 24, 2009
ABC News, Gingrich Rips Obama Budget's 'Energy Tax'; OMB Says Higher Costs Offset by Tax Credit, by Teddy Davis, February 27, 2009
YouTube, Mitt Romney on Cap and Trade, October 7, 2009
Grist, Is Jon Huntsman the greenest GOP presidential hopeful?, by Lisa Hymas, February 2, 2011
The Associated Press, The 2008 Democratic and Republican presidential candidates' positions on the issues, by Calvin Woodward, Dec. 18, 2007
The Boston Herald, Romney OK with plan on emissions, July 24, 2003
The Star Tribune, Michele Bachmann: 'Cap and trade'? More like 'tax and spend', by Rep. Michele Bachmann, June 9, 2008
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 2:00 PM on March 30, 2011
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: Bachmann fact check, Michele Bachmann, PoliGraph
As Rep. Michele Bachmann tours the country testing the waters for a potential presidential run, she'll be talking a lot about Congress's recent health care overhaul.
In a March 23, 2010 speech in Iowa, Bachmann said that most Americans want to overturn the law.
"From the day it passed one year ago until today, there hasn't been one week that a majority of Americans haven't said 'kill that bill,'" she said.
Bachmann's claim is hard to substantiate, in part because she uses only one poll to back it up.
The Evidence
Bachmann spokesman Andy Parrish points to a Rasmussen Reports poll that's been taken regularly since Congress passed the health care overhaul in March 2010. (As far as PoliGraph can tell, this is the only poll that's asked the question weekly for the past year).
According to that data, a majority of likely voters said they would support repealing the new law. The most recent numbers show that 58 percent of those polled strongly favor or somewhat favor getting rid of the bill.
But that's just one poll. In fact, the numbers are all over the map.
For instance:
โข A Kaiser Family Foundation poll done earlier this year found that 39 percent of participants supported Congress replacing the health care law with a Republican alternative or axing it all together.
โข A recent NBC/Wall Street Journal poll found that 45 percent would support eliminating the law and 46 percent would support keeping the law.
โข A January 2011 CNN poll found that 50 percent of voters would support repealing all provisions of the law compared to 42 percent who would support keeping the law intact.
โข And a New York Times/CBS poll conducted three times in the last six months shows that less than 50 percent of respondents would support repealing the health care overhaul.
Some of these polls show that voters only want parts of the law overturned, not all of it.
The Verdict
Bachmann's correct that there's solid support for repealing some or all the health care bill. What's unclear is whether the majority of Americans do, or if they have every week for the last year. One poll supports this claim, others don't.
As a result, Bachmann's claim is Inconclusive.
SOURCES
Michele Bachmann, Facebook profile, speech, March 23, 2011
Rasmussen Reports, Health Care Law: 58% Now Favor Health Care Repeal, March 28, 2011
Kaiser Family Foundation, Kaiser Health Tracking Poll: February 2011, accessed March 29, 2011
The New York Times, CBS poll, January 15-19, 2011, accessed March 29, 2011
CNN Opinion Research: January 14-16, 2011, accessed March 29, 2011
NBC/Wall Street Journal Survey, January 13-17, 2011, accessed March 29, 2011
Pollster.com, Health care plan: Favor/Oppose, accessed March 29, 2011
The Washington Post, Is support for repeal vastly overstated?, By Greg Sargent, Jan. 21, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 1:46 PM on March 25, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(4 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
Republican legislators are targeting local government aid as they attempt to erase the state's $5 billion deficit.
Minneapolis Mayor R.T. Rybak defended the program on his blog, arguing against the contention that state aid is a handout.
"Minneapolis helps keep the state afloat," Rybak wrote. "This year alone, we will send $367.5 million more to the state in sales and property taxes than the state has promised us back in LGA."
Rybak's numbers are on point.
The Evidence
LGA is given to Minnesota communities that would have a hard time paying for services with property taxes alone. Both the House and Senate are debating bills that would cut LGA; the House bill would phase out aid for Minneapolis, St. Paul and Duluth.
Rybak lays out a lot of reasons why he thinks cutting LGA is a bad idea, pointing out that Minneapolis puts more in the state coffers than it takes out in state aid.
He's correct.
City budgeters estimate that the state will collect roughly $380 million in sales taxes and roughly $75 million in commercial property taxes from Minneapolis.
Minus the $87.5 million in LGA Minneapolis is slated to get in 2011, the city is expected to provide the state with $367.5 million this year.
The Verdict
For his first PoliGraph test, Rybak earns an Accurate.
SOURCES
The Mayor's Blog, Urgent: Need your help today to hold the line on property taxes, by Mayor R.T. Rybak, March 18, 2011
Minnesota State Legislature, House Research: The City LGA Program, by Pat Dalton, January 2009
Minnesota Public Radio News, Senate GOP bill slashes local government aid, by Tim Pugmire, March 23, 2011
The City of Minneapolis, 2011 Budget, accessed March 23, 2011
The Minnesota Department of Revenue, Minnesota Sales and Use Tax: Instruction Booklet, accessed March 23, 2011
Interview, John Stiles, spokesman, Mayor R.T. Rybak, March 22, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 2:00 PM on March 23, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph, U.S. Senate
To slash the deficit, lawmakers in Washington, D.C., need to go after the big bucks, says Sen. Al Franken.
Case in point: tax breaks for oil and gas companies.
"Over the past decade, the five largest oil and gas companies have made $1 trillion in profit," Franken said during a March 9, 2011, floor speech after the Senate rejected a bill to cut spending. "Yet they are benefiting from tax subsidies that have been in place since as far back as 1916. Eliminating these wasteful subsidies will bring in about $64 billion over 10 years."
Franken's savings estimate is off by billions, but his underlying point is on target.
The Evidence
In inflation adjusted dollars, it's true that the largest oil and gas companies operating in the United States made about $893 billion over the last decade. Franken said $1 trillion, but he's still in the ballpark.
It's also true that oil and gas companies benefit from a slate of tax breaks and subsidies meant to spur investment and production, some of which have been in place for many decades. If they were all eliminated, it would save the government roughly $46 billion over 10 years, according to the Office of Management and Budget. An additional $10 billion could be saved by axing a foreign tax credit that largely benefits oil and gas companies, a perk that Franken also advocates eliminating.
Still, Franken's saving estimate is high because he's also counting the nonconventional fuels credit, a tax break that's no longer available to the vast majority of oil and gas producers. Franken's office estimated it would $20 billion over 10 years; in reality, it will only cost $100 million through 2014.
The Verdict
Franken's numbers are off by 12 percent, but he is essentially correct. Eliminating tax breaks for oil and gas companies would save billions.
It's a close call given the bad math, but Franken's claim passes the PoliGraph test.
SOURCES
Sen. Al Franken, floor speech, March 9, 2011
Budget of the U.S. Government, Fiscal Year 2011, accessed March 21, 2011
The Center for American Progress, Eliminating Tax Subsidies for Oil Companies, by Sima J. Gandhi, May 13, 2010
The Center for American Progress, Big Oil's Lust for Tax Loopholes: Oil Prices and Profits Rise While Big Oil Defends Its Tax Loopholes, by Daniel J. Weiss, January 31, 2011
The Environmental Law Institute, Estimating U.S. Government Subsidies
to Energy Sources: 2002-2008, September 2009
The Congressional Research Service, Oil and Gas Tax Subsidies:
Current Status and Analysis, February 27, 2007
The U.S. Treasury Department, General Explanations of the Administration's Fiscal Year 2010 Revenue Proposals, February 2011
The Joint Committee on Taxation, Estimates Of Federal Tax Expenditures For Fiscal Years 2010-2014, December 2010
Interview, Ed Shelleby, press secretary, Sen. Al Franken, March 14, 2011
Interview, Daniel Weiss, senior fellow, Director of Climate Strategy, The Center for American Progress, March 14, 2011
Interview, Seth Hanlon, Director of Fiscal Reform, Doing What Works program, March 18, 2011
Interview, Lisa Goldman, senior attorney, Environmental Law Institute, March 21, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 2:30 PM on March 11, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: MN Legislature, PoliGraph
On the floor of the Minnesota Senate, Tax Committee Chair Sen. Julianne Ortman, R-Chanhassen, made this prediction about Gov. Mark Dayton's income tax plan:
"The Senate fiscal staff has prepared an analysis, Madam President," Ortman said on March 3, 2011. "It's dated 2/24/11, and it shows that Gov. Dayton's proposal would actually impose that 10.95 percent on all income earners in the state of Minnesota within 15 years, because the governor doesn't index the top bracket."
Ortman's claim that all Minnesotans would pay higher taxes because Dayton's plan does not account for inflation is an exaggeration.
The Evidence
Ortman is talking about is "bracket creep" - the movement of taxpayers into higher brackets when their income increases due to inflation.
As Dayton's plan stands, the new tier would not be indexed for inflation, unlike Minnesota's current brackets. That means more people would end up paying the higher rate over time.
But the Senate fiscal report Ortman refers to does not support the claim that all Minnesota taxpayers would be affected by the 10.95 percent rate within 15 years. In fact, it doesn't even project that far. For all taxpayers to be captured by the new rate within the next 15 years would require an explosion in wages or a significant increase in inflation, say tax experts.
"The point is that everybody is going to be affected by this," Ortman said of her claim. "Yes, it's theoretical, but it's there."
The Verdict
It is highly unlikely all Minnesota taxpayers will be paying Dayton's proposed top rate in 15 years.
Ortman's claim does not pass the PoliGraph test.
SOURCES
Senate Fiscal Report: Analysis of Gov. Dayton's 4th Tier Without Inflation Adjustment, Feb. 24, 2011
MPR News, FAQ: Making sense of Dayton's budget proposal, by Madeleine Baran, and
Elizabeth Dunbar, February 15, 2011
Minnesota Management and Budget, Minnesota Biennial Budget: FY 2012-2013, accessed March 10, 2011
Supporting documents from Sen. Ortman, March 10, 2011
Interview, Sen. Julianne Ortman, Tax Committee Chair, March 3, 2011
Interview, Mark Haveman, Executive Director, Minnesota Taxpayers Association, March 10, 2011
Interview, Kit Borgman, spokeswoman, Minnesota Department of Revenue, March 9, 2011
Interview, John Spry, Associate Professor, University of St. Thomas, March 10, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 12:15 PM on March 9, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(14 Comments)
Filed under: Bachmann fact check, Michele Bachmann, PoliGraph
Michele Bachmann has a bone to pick with the authors of the health care reform bill.
"There was a Congressional Research Service report that just was issued in February, and we discovered that secretly, unbeknownst to members of Congress, over $105 billion was hidden in the Obamacare legislation to fund the implementation of Obamacare," she said during her March 6, 2011 appearance on Meet the Press.
In a separate press release issued March 4, she said the funding was a "new $105 billion levy on American taxpayers."
Bachmann's figure of $105 billion is in the ballpark. But she's wrong to say the number was a secret.
The Evidence
Bachmann's office did not return PoliGraph's emails or phone calls for clarification on her statement, but it appears she's referring to a February, 2011, Congressional Research Service report that outlines appropriations and funding transfers in the health care overhaul.
According to that CRS report, the bill includes nearly $105 billion in spending through 2019 for new programs created by the health care bill, such as the health insurance exchanges, and existing programs, such as the Children's Health Insurance Program.
But to say that this funding was somehow hidden from lawmakers is false. Spending was clearly outlined in the legislation, and lawmakers had about three months to read the text before voting on it. Furthermore, many of these provisions, such as a temporary program for those who have pre-existing conditions, which will get $5 billion, and a plan to create health insurance co-ops, which will get $6 billion, got a lot of media attention throughout the health care debate.
Bachmann's separate claim that the $105 billion in spending is a "levy on American taxpayers" is false. While the health care bill is paid for partly with tax increases and partly with savings from programs like Medicare, Bachmann is referring to spending appropriations, not new taxes as her claim would imply. And at least $11.8 billion of that funding is simply being transferred from existing spending, such as Medicare Part A, to new programs.
The Verdict
Bachmann is correct to say that there is $105 billion in funding in the health care bill. But her claim makes it appear that this is news. It is not. And the appropriations she's referring to are not tax increases.
By cloaking the numbers in claims that the Obama administration is hiding the money, her claim goes beyond misleading to false.
SOURCES
Meet the Press, Sunday, March 6, 2011
Press Release, Bachmann Calls on President to Apologize, March 4, 2011
The Congressional Research Service, Appropriations and Fund Transfers in the Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act (PPACA), by C. Stephen Redhead, October 14, 2010
The Congressional Research Service, Appropriations and Fund Transfers in the Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act (PPACA), by C. Stephen Redhead, February 10, 2011 (Get link)
The House of Representatives, Compilation of Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act, as amended through May 1, 2010, accessed March. 7, 2011
Thomas, Health Care and Education Reconciliation Act of 2010, accessed March 7, 2011
Thomas, Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act, accessed March 7, 2011
The Kaiser Family Foundation, Summary of the New Health Reform Law, March 26, 2010
The Congressional Budget Office, Selected CBO Publications Related to Health Care Legislation, 2009-2010, December 2010
Reuters, FACTBOX-Major tax provisions in U.S. healthcare bill, March 22, 2010
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 2:21 PM on March 4, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(4 Comments)
Filed under: Mark Dayton, PoliGraph
During his recent rounds on radio and television, Gov. Mark Dayton has been touting the fact that neither he nor his Republican colleagues in the House and Senate have a mandate to govern because no one got the majority of the vote.
"I was elected with 43 percent of the people who voted in the last election and the Republican majorities in the Senate and the House were elected with 41 percent and 40 percent respectively," he said during an interview on TPT's Almanac last month.
He repeated a similar claim Tuesday on MPR News' Midday.
Dayton's numbers don't hold up.
The Evidence
Of the nearly 2.1 million votes cast for governor in 2010, Dayton got roughly 919,000 votes - or about 43 percent. So he gets that percentage right.
About 2 million people voted for candidates for the Minnesota Senate. Of those votes, 49.72 were for a Republican; not a majority, but a lot closer than Dayton's claim.
Additionally, roughly 2 million people voted in Minnesota House races. Of those, 50.44 percent cast ballots for a Republican.
Dayton's staff responded, saying that he's talking about the percentage of voters who elected winning candidates - the votes that helped the GOP take both chambers.
By that measure, Dayton's contention would have been better served if he had the percentages right -- 35 percent went to winning GOP candidates in both chambers, not "41 percent and 40 percent respectively."
The Verdict
Dayton only considered the percentage of voters who cast ballots for winning candidates. His comparison fails to point out that far more people voted for Republican legislators in the 2010 election.
The governor's statement is misleading to the point that it earns a false on the PoliGraph test.
SOURCES
MPR News' Midday, March 1, 2011
TPT, Almanac, Feb. 18, 2011
Minnesota Secretary of State, General Election Results for Governor, last updated Jan. 19, 2011, accessed March 3, 2011
Minnesota Secretary of State, Senate Race Results, accessed March 4, 2011
Minnesota Secretary of State, House Race Results, accessed March 4, 2011
Interview, Katie Tinucci, spokeswoman, Mark Dayton, March 3, 2011
Interview, Steven Schier, professor, Carleton College, March 4, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 4:00 PM on March 2, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(1 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph
As a battle over public employee bargaining rights rages in Wisconsin, Minnesota labor leaders are touting the positive effects of union membership.
For instance, Eliot Seide, Executive Director of the American Federation of State, County and Municipal Employees, defended the benefits of unionization during an interview with MPR News last week:
"The 10 states where [unions are] most dense, the poverty rate is lower, health care is better, household income is higher, education spending per pupil is higher, and frankly the quality of life is better because trade unions in this country - public and private - have created the middle class and are essential to a democracy in this country."
Seide's facts are correct and comparisons are fair. But whether unions lead to a better quality of life is another story.
The Evidence
Seide is comparing states with the largest percentage of unionized workers, which include New York, Alaska and Washington, to states with the lowest percentage, which include South Dakota, Oklahoma and a handful of southern states.
According to Census Bureau and Bureau of Labor Statistics data, Seide's comparisons are all correct. For instance, the average annual median income in states with robust unions is $56,412, while states with sparse unionization have an average median income of $43,816. Poverty rates in these states tend to be lower and more people have health care coverage.
Coincidence? Yes and no.
Labor academics and economists agree that it is misleading to imply that unions are responsible for creating a better quality of life, because there are many other factors that lead to higher income and lower poverty rates.
That said, labor experts also noted that unions have historically supported and backed politicians who support policies that lead, for instance, to higher education spending; public employee unions have long pushed for more education dollars because their members, namely public school teachers, benefit from such spending increases.
The Verdict
This is a tough claim to rate because of Seide's concluding assertion -- that unions are responsible for a better quality of life. It's simply an overstatement. Still, his facts are accurate and comparisons are correct. It's also accurate to say that unions have played a role in shaping public policy, including efforts to increase education spending and lower the poverty rate.
So with those important caveats, Seide's claim passes the PoliGraph test.
SOURCES
Minnesota Public Radio, Midday, Feb. 25, 2011
The AFL-CIO, Right to Work for Less, accessed March 1, 2011
AFSCME, Minnesota Council 5, Why Unions?, accessed March 1, 2011
The AFL-CIO, Unions Raise Wages for All Worker, accessed March 1, 2011
The Bureau of Labor Statistics, Union affiliation of employed wage and salary workers by state, accessed Mar. 1, 2011
The U.S. Census Bureau, Income data, 2009, accessed March 1, 2011
The U.S. Census Bureau, Income, Poverty, and Health Insurance Coverage in the United States: 2009, Sept. 2010
The U.S. Census Bureau, Health Insurance Coverage Status by State for All People: 2009, accessed March 1, 2011
The U.S. Census Bureau, Public Elementary-Secondary Education Finance Data, accessed March 1, 2011
The Washington Post, How Do Unions Affect State Spending and Taxation?, by Ezra Klein, Feb. 25, 2011
Interview, Jennifer Munt, spokesperson, AFSCME Council 5
Interview, Morris Kleiner, professor, The Humphrey School of Public Affairs, The
University of Minnesota - Twin Cities, March 2, 2011
Interview, Alex Keyssar, professor, The Kennedy School of Government, Harvard University, March 1, 2011
Interview, Daniel DiSalvo, professor, The City College of New York - CUNY, March 2, 2011
Interview, Richard Levins, professor emeritus, Department of Applied Economics, The University of Minnesota-Twin Cities, March 1, 2011
More
Posted at 3:00 PM on February 25, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(7 Comments)
Filed under: MN Legislature, Mark Dayton, PoliGraph
Minnesota Republicans' biggest complaint about Gov. Mark Dayton's budget proposal can be summed up in one word: taxes.
They claim Dayton's proposed $4 billion in new revenue will hurt small businesses, as House Speaker Kurt Zellers pointed out in a Feb. 18, 2011 email to constituents.
"These tax increases will fall disproportionately on job creators," Zellers wrote. "Approximately 92 percent of small businesses pay their taxes through the individual income tax."
Zellers is exaggerating the impact of Dayton's proposal.
The Evidence
Zellers' concern centers on Dayton's proposal to impose a 10.95 percent income tax rate on single filers making more than $85,000 in after tax income and couples making more than $150,000 in after tax income. Those making more than $500,000 in taxable income annually would see an additional 3 percent surtax, making Minnesota's top income tax rate 13.95 percent. GOP legislators, including Zellers, say these income tax hikes will hurt small businesses most.
There are several ways to measure the size of a small business. In some cases, the Small Business Administration (SBA) looks at a firm's annual receipts; in others, it focuses on the number of employees. Regardless, Zellers is correct that about 92 percent pay taxes through the individual return.
But the SBA definitions don't mean much when it comes to taxes because some large companies pay their taxes through the individual return, and some very small companies pay corporate taxes.
Instead, The Minnesota Department of Revenue examines how much money individuals report from a business enterprise on their personal income tax returns. These dollars come from sole proprietorships, S-corporations and partnerships, which tend to have fewer employees.
Each year, about 360,000 individuals - or about 16 percent of all tax returns - report some sort of flow-through income, according to revenue department. Of those, only about 40,000, or 11 percent, would be affected by Dayton's new tax plan - that is, people making more than $85,000 in after-tax income and couples making more than $150,000 in after-tax income.
Zellers is wrong that the impact of Dayton's proposal would hurt the vast majority of Minnesota's small businesses, as his claim implies.
The Verdict
The verdict on Zellers' claim is false. He correctly points out that 92 percent of "small" Minnesota firms pay taxes through the individual return. But from there, the facts to support his claim get murky. It is false that most small businesses would be hit by the new tax, as Zellers' claim implies; only 11 percent would feel the effect.
This claim fails the PoliGraph test.
SOURCES
The Small Business Administration, Minnesota: Small Business Profile, accessed Feb. 23, 2011
The Minnesota Chamber of Commerce, Fiscal FAQ, accessed Feb. 24, 2011
The Minnesota Department of Revenue, Governor's Proposed Income Tax Changes and Flow-Through Businesses, accessed Feb. 24, 2011
The Minnesota Legislature, Taxation and Small Business in Minnesota, by Nina Manzi and Joel Michael, January 2011
Minnesota Public Radio, U of M economist on how state tax rates affect jobs, by Tom Crann, Feb. 16, 2011
The Small Business Administration, Table of Small Business Size Standards
Matched to North American Industry Classification System Codes, accessed Feb. 23, 2011
Minnesota Department of Employment and Economic Development, Employment Distribution by Size of Firm and Major Industry Division, accessed Feb. 24, 2011
Growth and Justice, An Analysis of a Proposal to Add a Fourth Tier to Minnesota's Individual Income Tax, By Marsha Blumenthal, Ph.D. and Charles Quimby, May 11, 2009
Interview, Jodi Boyne, spokeswoman, House Speaker Kurt Zellers, Feb. 24, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 2:00 PM on February 23, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: MN Legislature, Mark Dayton, PoliGraph
Gov. Mark Dayton's $37 billion budget plan has not been warmly received by Republicans.
For instance, GOP House Majority Leader Matt Dean objects to the $4 billion in new taxes and surcharges contained in the bill. They represent "the largest tax increase in Minnesota's history," Dean said during a Feb. 15, 2011 press conference.
Largest in the state's history? Maybe.
The Evidence
In an attempt to reduce the state's deficit, Dayton's budget proposes tax increases and new fees amounting to $4.129 billion over the 2012-2013 budget period - roughly 11 percent of Dayton's overall two- year general fund budget.
This claim is tricky to sort out. First, the state doesn't have adequate tax data going back to Minnesota's earliest days, so it's difficult to say whether Dayton's plan would be the largest in Minnesota's history.
Still, there are some notable tax moments in Minnesota's recent history that serve as good benchmarks.
The "Minnesota Miracle": For many years, communities relied on local taxes to support their schools and services. But in the late 1960s, less affluent towns were having trouble raising enough money to adequately support education and services. In 1971, the Legislature approved a sweeping package of tax changes meant to equalize school and services funding across all Minnesota towns. Called the "Minnesota Miracle," it was estimated to generate $580 million over two years in new revenue - about $3 billion in today's dollars - and represented about 20 percent of the 1972-1973 $2.8 billion general fund.
Income Tax Surcharges: In the early 1980s, the state was facing major revenue shortfalls. In an attempt to make up for the loss, the legislature approved more than $1 billion in new taxes between 1981 and 1984. Today, those changes would be valued at more than $2 billion. But each tax change was relatively small. For instance, a 7 percent income tax surtax - later increased to 10 percent - raised roughly $230 million in new revenue between 1981 and 1983, or nearly $500 million today. It represented about 3 percent of the 1982-1983 $8.2 billion general fund.
The 2008 Transportation Taxes: In 2008, the Legislature overrode Gov. Tim Pawlenty's veto of a massive transportation bill, which raised the gas tax by 5.5 cents per gallon and included other transportation fees. At the time, legislative researchers estimated the bill would raise roughly $6 billion over 10 years. Based on that projection, the taxes will add an average of $1 billion to the state's coffers every two years.
The Verdict
Dean's claim is Inconclusive because it's difficult to check it against every tax increase in the state's history. However, it appears that Dayton's revenue proposal is quite large compared to some of the state's recent tax increases. But as a percentage of the two-year general fund budget it would still be smaller than the "Minnesota Miracle."
SOURCES
The Uptake, GOP, DFL Leadership Reacts to Gov. Dayton's Budget, Feb. 15, 2011
Minnesota Management and Budget, FY 2012-2013 Biennial Budget, accessed Feb. 15, 2011
Minnesota Management and Budget, Historical Expenditures: General Fund and All Funds, accessed Feb. 17, 2011
The Minnesota Historical Society, Public Education - The Minnesota Miracle, accessed Feb. 16, 2011
The William Mitchell Law Review, The Minnesota Disparities Act of 1971: The Twin Cities' Struggle and Blueprint for Regional Cooperation, by Myron Orfield and Nicholas Wallace, March 7, 2007
Minnesota History, The Minnesota Miracle: A Roundtable Discussion, Winter 2007-2008
Strong Towns, A Brief History of Minnesota's System of Local, Government Finance: 1960โ2010, accessed Feb. 15, 2011
Minnesota Legislature, Laws 2008, Chapter 152: Preliminary Resource Estimates (FY 2009 - FY 2018), accessed Feb. 16, 2011
Center for Educational Policy Studies, Chronology of Minnesota's Fiscal Crisis July 1, 1979 though Dec. 31, 1982, January 1983
Minnesota Legislature, Fiscal Review 1981-1981, January 1985, accessed Feb. 16, 2011
The Star Tribune, Editorial: Fact or fallacy: Legislators blur the line, March 1, 2008
Minnesota Public Radio, State's Gas Tax Goes Up Today, by Tom Weber, April 1, 2008
Interview, Mark Haveman, Executive Director, Minnesota Taxpayers Association, Feb. 17, 2011
Interview, Rep. Phil Krinkie, President, Taxpayers League of Minnesota, Feb. 15, 2011
Interview, Scott Russell, Policy Analyst, Minnesota Budget Project, Feb. 16, 2011
Interview, Joel Michael, House Legislative Researcher, Feb. 15, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 3:30 PM on February 17, 2011
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: Mark Dayton, PoliGraph
During his State of the State speech, Gov. Mark Dayton made some troubling observations about Minnesota's economy, including this one:
"Our employment growth averaged in the bottom 10 among the 50 states during the past decade," he said on Feb. 9, 2010.
While the state's job growth in the last decade has been lackluster, Minnesota's rank is difficult to pinpoint.
The Evidence
Dayton's facts come from a report by Minnesota2020, a left-leaning think tank that argues the state is in poor economic health. According to the report, Minnesota's employment growth rate rank sank from 26th in 2002 to 46th in 2007, but was on the uptick again toward the end of the last decade.
PoliGraph crunched the numbers, too, and found that between 2000 and 2010, Minnesota's rank hovered around 30th place - not in the bottom 10.
It appears the Minnesota2020 report used employment data from the Local Area Unemployment branch of the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), which can include those who are self-employed and farm workers. PoliGraph used employment data based on the number of payroll jobs in the country from the Current Employment Statistics branch of the BLS, which likely accounts for the different rankings.
But regardless of where Minnesota ranks, the data underscore Dayton's overall point: The state's unemployment growth has been less than impressive over the last decade, lagging behind other states and the national average.
The state experienced above average population growth throughout the 1990s, and that translated to more jobs. But in 2001, the country fell into a recession. Minnesota's job growth stalled around that time, and it hasn't been able to bounce back since.
The reasons are a bit mysterious, according to state economists. In part, Minnesota's job growth deteriorated along with national declines in manufacturing. Other industries, including financial services and the airline business, have suffered, and slow housing and construction industries may also have played a role. And it may be that some employers have been more productive with a smaller workforce.
All that said, employment growth is just one of many factors used to gauge a state's economic health. Indeed, the state's unemployment rate has consistently remained below the national average, Minnesotans make more income per capita than many other states, and Minnesota's employment ratio - meaning the percent of working age people that do have a job - ranks among the top 10 in the nation.
The Verdict
PoliGraph ranks this claim Inconclusive because Minnesota's employment growth ranks differently depending on the way you measure it. That said, Dayton's overall point is correct: Minnesota job expansion in recent years has been modest at best compared to other states.
SOURCES
Minnesota2020, On Our Way to Average: Ranking Minnesota's Economic Performance, by Jeff Van Wychen, January, 2010
Employment Growth Rankings: 2000-2010, Bureau of Labor Statistics, Non-Farm Employment, Seasonally Adjusted, created Feb. 11, 2011
Minnesota Management and Budget, Minnesota Economic Outlook, Nov. 2010
Minnesota Management and Budget, State Revenues on Forecast Since November, Jan. 2006
Minnesota Management and Budget, State Revenues on Forecast in February and March, April 1999
Management and Budget, November and December Revenues Less than Forecast, January 2001
Minnesota Management and Budget, Economic Outlook, Nov. 2008
The Hubert H. Humphrey School of Public Affairs, Economic Challenges Facing the Upper Midwest, March 2004, accessed Feb. 12, 2011
Minnesota's Economics and Demographics: Looking 2030 and Beyond, by Tom Stinson and Tom Gillaspy, July 2008
Minnesota State Demographic Center, The Long Run Has Become the Short Run: Budget Implications of Demographic Change, Feb. 3, 2011
The Bureau of Labor Statistics, Differences Between Data Series, accessed Feb. 16, 2011
Interview, Jeremy Drucker, spokesman, Gov. Mark Dayton, Feb. 9, 2011
Interview, Art Rolnick, former director of research, Minneapolis Federal Reserve; Senior Fellow, the Humphrey School of Public Affairs, Feb. 11, 2011
Interview, Tom Gillaspy, State Demographer, Feb. 14, 2011
Interview, Catherine Varner, Economist, Bureau of Labor Statistics
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 11:52 AM on February 10, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(1 Comments)
Filed under: Mark Dayton, PoliGraph
Minnesota's economy was the theme of Gov. Mark Dayton's first State of the State speech delivered Wednesday.
To help make his point, Dayton said that fewer people are working today than were working eight years ago.
"Last December, there were over 77,000 more Minnesotans unemployed than in December 2002, just before Gov. Pawlenty took office," he said on Feb. 9, 2011. "There were 5,881 fewer people working in Minnesota than there were eight years ago, even though our state's population grew during that time by over 286,000 people."
Dayton's numbers are right, but they deserve some context.
The Evidence
In Dec. 2002, roughly 128,000 people were unemployed. Now, that number stands at approximately 206,000 unemployed - a difference of about 78,000, as Dayton estimated. Further, it's correct that 5,881 fewer people working in Minnesota these days, according to the Minnesota Department of Employment and Economic Development. Dayton's also in the ballpark on population growth.
But while Dayton's numbers are right, it's important to consider them in context. The national recession had a sizeable impact on Minnesota, including significant job losses between 2008 and 2009; the peak came in May of 2009, when more than 250,000 people were out of a job. In fact, before the middle of 2008, it was unusual for more than 140,000 people to be jobless.
So, Dayton's figures may be rosier had there been no recession.
The Verdict
With some context, Dayton's good on his numbers.
SOURCES
The Minnesota Department of Employment and Economic Development, Minnesota Unemployment Statistics, Dec. 2002 - Dec. 2010, accessed Feb. 9, 2011
The Minnesota Department of Employment and Economic Development, Minnesota Population Estimates, 1998-2009, accessed Feb. 9, 2011
The Minnesota Department of Employment and Economic Development, The Recession Hits Home, by Dave Snef, June 2009
The Minnesota Geospatial Information Office, Minnesota Population Estimate, accessed Feb. 9, 2010
Interview, Jeremy Drucker, spokesman, Gov. Mark Dayton, Feb. 9, 2010
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 3:19 PM on February 9, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(3 Comments)
Filed under: Mark Dayton, PoliGraph
Editor's Note: This replaces a previous post that contained incomplete information leading to a "false" rating. Other sources show the governor can make a case for his comments based on averages, which was not clear from his original statement.
Gov. Mark Dayton gave his first State of the State address Wednesday, so over the next few days we'll take a look at some of his statements. In the speech, Dayton argued that Minnesota isn't doing enough to support public schools.
In higher education, he said a decline in state investment has translated to higher tuition in two-and-four year universities.
"Tuition in our state's two-year public colleges has risen to the third-highest in the nation; tuitions in our four-year universities are among the top-ten highest."
Dayton's statement is misleading.
The Evidence
No single Minnesota school ranks that high, but on average they do.
The University of Minnesota in the Twin Cities ranks 40th out of 598 four-year public universities in in-state tuition, and 278th in out-of-state tuition, according to the Chronicle of Higher Education. The U also isn't among the most expensive schools in the country when you factor fees and room and board.
The most expensive two-year Minnesota school is Dakota County Technical College in Rosemount, Minn., which charges $5,298 a semester, and ranks 28th among two-year public colleges, according to the publication.
However, Dayton's office sent us studies that calculated averages for four-and-two year public institutions.
A report by the CollegeBoard Advocacy and Policy Center puts Minnesota's four-year public school average tuition fee of $8,665 in 10th place. And Minnesota's average community college tuition of roughly $4,700 ranked third.
So, when it comes to averages, Minnesota's at the top of the pack. When it comes to individual schools, Minnesota's well out of the top 10.
The Verdict
There's more than one way to look at the cost of the higher education. Dayton was using averages in his speech, but he didn't make that clear. This PoliGraph test is misleading.
SOURCES
Gov. Mark Dayton's State of the State speech, Feb. 9, 2011
The Chronicle of Higher Education, Tuition and Fees, 2009-2010 and 2010-2011, Public two-year schools, accessed Feb. 9, 2011
The Chronicle of Higher Education, Tuition and Fees, 2009-2010 and 2010-2011, Pubic four-year schools, accessed Feb. 9, 2011
CollegeBoard study of average costs
Washington State Higher Education Coordinating Board annual study
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 1:58 PM on February 2, 2011
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: MN Legislature, PoliGraph
Rep. Paul Marquart, DFL-Dilworth, may not be a household name but he recently spoke about an issue that's making headlines all over Minnesota: the state's projected $6.2 billion deficit.
In debate on the House floor on a Republican-backed proposal to cut $1 billion in state spending, Marquart said this on Jan 27: "Make no doubt about it, this bill creates up to over $300 million of new property tax increases on our senior citizens on fixed incomes, our families, our farmers and our small businesses."
Marquart is on firm ground with his numbers, but local governments will make the final decision on property taxes.
The Evidence
Marquart voted against the Republican-controlled Legislature's first stab at reducing the state's deficit. The legislation would make permanent many of the one-time spending cuts Gov. Tim Pawlenty and the Legislature agreed on last year. Included in those cuts is a $487 million reduction in state aid to local governments and counties.
The Minnesota Department of Revenue estimates that these cuts will result in more than $300 million in new property taxes. To come up with this figure, budget crunchers use a formula that predicts property taxes will increase roughly 66 cents for every dollar the state cuts in aid. The assumption is based on historical data, and is reviewed annually by researchers at the revenue department and the Legislature.
So, Marquart's claim is plausible. But it's important to point out that the Legislature doesn't set property taxes; local governments do.
Further, the budgeting formula is based on an estimate. For example, it would be incorrect to assume that all local governments will increase property taxes. In fact, researchers at the revenue department and in the Legislature say the formula may be on the high end because many local governments have not raised property taxes as a result of the recession.
The Verdict
While it remains to be seen how much property taxes will increase, Marquart has a firm foundation for making his prediction.
His statement ranks an accurate on this PoliGraph test.
SOURCES
Minnesota State Legislature, text of H.F. 130, accessed Feb. 1, 2011
Minnesota State Legislature, Summary H.F. 130, accessed Feb. 1, 2011
Minnesota Department of Revenue, Analysis H.F. 130, Jan. 25, 2011
Minnesota Public Radio, Minn. House passes $1 billion state budget cut, by Tom Scheck, Jan. 28, 2011
Interview, Rep. Paul Marquart, DFL-Dilworth, Jan. 31, 2011
Interview, Pat Dalton, House Research Department, Feb. 1, 2011
Interview, Eric Willette, Property Tax Research Director, Minnesota Department of Revenue, Feb. 1, 2011
More
Posted at 2:00 PM on January 28, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(7 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph, Tim Pawlenty
This is the fifth and final in a series of fact checks this week reviewing former Gov. Tim Pawlenty's book - Courage to Stand - as he tours the nation promoting it and exploring the possibility of a run for president.
Like many of his fellow Republicans, Pawlenty believes that public sector workers are overpaid.
"Why are government employees making 22 percent more than their private-sector counterparts, plus enjoying better benefits and nearly perfect job security?," Pawlenty wrote on page 276.
Pawlenty gets this one right, with a few caveats.
The Evidence
According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), public sector workers - including all federal, state and local employees - make roughly 22 percent more in raw wages compared to the private sector.
Generally speaking, public sector employees get a wider variety of benefits as well, such as health care, pension and better paid leave. For instance, in 2010, it cost state and local governments an average of $13.85 per worker to cover benefits compared to an average of $8.20 in the private sector.
Many economists argue the disparity between private sector pay and public sector pay is due to the larger number of blue-collar jobs in the private workforce. These jobs pay less, effectively drawing down average wages.
Note that Pawlenty is talking about an overall average. In many instances, job-to-job comparisons show that public workers make less than their private sector counterparts. For instance, a lawyer working for the government makes an average of $98,120 annually, while a lawyer working in the private sector makes $137,540 a year - a significant difference. And government economists make about one-third less than their private-sector counterparts.
The Verdict
All in all, this claim is accurate.
Sources
The Bureau of Labor Statistics, May 2009 National Occupational Employment and Wage Estimates by ownership: Cross-industry, private ownership only, accessed Jan 27, 2011
The Bureau of Labor Statistics, May 2009 National Industry-Specific Occupational Employment and Wage Estimates: Federal, State and Local Government, accessed Jan. 26, 2011
The Bureau of Labor Statistics, Employer Costs for Employee Compensation - Sept. 2010, Dec. 8, 2010
The Bureau of Labor Statistics, Employer costs for employee compensation, September 2009
The New York Times, Are Federal Workers Overpaid?, by Nancy Folbre, Oct. 13, 2009
The Cato Institute, Employee Compensation in State and Local Governments, by Chris Edwards, Jan. 2010
The Cato Institute, Federal Pay Continues Rapid Ascent, by Chris Edwards, Aug. 24, 2009
Posted at 2:00 PM on January 27, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(3 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph, Tim Pawlenty
This is the fourth in a series of fact checks this week reviewing former Gov. Tim Pawlenty's book - Courage to Stand - as he tours the nation promoting it and exploring the possibility of a run for president.
Pawlenty frequently says that he drove down state spending during his administration.
Here's what he wrote about the issue on page 183 of his book:
"The average two-year increase in Minnesota state spending from 1960, the year I was born, until I became Governor was about 21 percent. We brought that down dramatically to an average of 1.7 percent per year during my time as Governor. And for the first time in the 150-year history of Minnesota, we reduced state spending in real terms."
At first blush, his claim checks out. But a deeper look reveals Pawlenty is being selective with the numbers and is omitting important context and adjustments.
The Evidence
Minnesota writes new budgets every two years, so spending can be measured in one- and-two year cycles.
Yes, according to Minnesota Management and Budget, the average two-year spending increase between 1960 and 2003, the year Pawlenty took office, was indeed roughly 21 percent.
However, the numbers used to figure the rate of increase were not adjusted for inflation or population growth. Accounting for these variables would show flatter state spending over time. As a result, Pawlenty's performance looks stellar.
Moreover, Pawlenty compared his one-year average rate of spending increase (1.7 percent) with the unadjusted two-year average, which inflates the gap between spending under his administration and his predecessors'. The state's unadjusted one-year average is 10 percent. (Inflation-adjusted data are not available.)
Furthermore, Pawlenty's claim doesn't reveal two favorable events in the most recent budget cycle: roughly $500 million in federal dollars for K-12 education that effectively lowered state spending in fiscal years 2010-2011 and the delay of $1.9 billion in payments to schools to future budget cycles.
The final part of Pawlenty's claim, that for the "first time in the 150-year history of Minnesota, we reduced state spending," is even harder to pin down, in large part because the Legislature and budget department don't readily have data going back that far. And even if the numbers were available, the General Fund of 1860 would be too different from the General Fund of 2011 to compare accurately.
Nevertheless, it appears that Pawlenty is being selective with the numbers on this point, as well. According to the budget department, it's a fact that the 2010-2011 two-year budget cycle is the only time since 1960 that the state decreased spending in terms of dollars. But on an annual basis, general fund spending declined in 1983, 1986, and 2004 as well, according to the same document.
The Verdict
The average state spending increase was indeed smaller during Pawlenty's administration.
However, Pawlenty's claim is misleading because he mixes a two-year average with a one-year average to make his spending restraint look stronger than it was. And when comparing the recent record with past decades he also doesn't account for inflation and population growth, federal stimulus money and an accounting shift. Finally, the governor cites 150 years of history with no source for where he got his information.
SOURCES
Minnesota Management and Budget, Historical Expenditures: General and All Funds, last updated Dec. 2, 2010, accessed Jan. 25, 2010
Minnesota 2020, State of the State Fact Check, by Jeff Van Wychen, Feb. 11, 2010
Minnesota Budget Bites, Governor's Budget Spares K-12 But Cost Shifts Remain, by Scott Russell, Feb. 22, 2010
Interview Bill Marx, Chief Financial Analyst, Minnesota House of Representatives, Jan. 26, 2010
Interview, Jay Kiedrowski, Senior Fellow, the Humphrey School of Public Affairs, Jan. 25, 2010
Interview John Pollard, spokesman, Minnesota Management and Budget, Jan 26, 2010
More
Posted at 2:00 PM on January 26, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(1 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph, Tim Pawlenty
This is the third in a series of fact checks this week reviewing former Gov. Tim Pawlenty's book - Courage to Stand - as he tours the nation promoting it and exploring the possibility of a run for president.
In the book Pawlenty bemoans big spending on President Barack Obama's watch.
"President Obama has overseen the first two budgets with trillion-dollar deficits in American history," he wrote on page 266. "He has racked up more debt than every President from Washington to Reagan combined."
On the surface, Pawlenty's claim is correct. But it implies that Obama is solely responsible for runaway spending. In fact, the deficit had already exceeded $1 trillion before the president took office.
The Evidence
According to the Congressional Budget Office (CBO), the deficit was $1.4 trillion in fiscal year 2009 and $1.3 trillion fiscal year 2010 - the first trillion dollar deficits in history, as Pawlenty correctly points out. (Because these figures are not adjusted for inflation, economists tend to compare deficits as percentage of gross domestic product. By that measure, the largest deficit in history occurred in 1943.)
He's also correct that more has been added to the national debt during the Obama administration than "every President from Washington to Reagan combined." When Reagan left office, the national debt was $2.190 trillion, according to CBO. During the first two years of the Obama administration, roughly $3 trillion has been added to the national debt, according to the Treasury Department.
But as is often the case with the federal budget, this story is more complicated than it seems.
Budget crunchers think in terms of fiscal years, which begin on Oct. 1 and end on Sept. 30. So a sizeable chunk of new spending in Obama's first year was the result of big-ticket items passed by a Democratic-controlled Congress and signed by President George W. Bush.
Almost half the spending increase - about $245 billion - stemmed from the Troubled Asset Relief Program (TARP) and payments to Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac. Further, revenue declined 17 percent between fiscal years 2008 and 2009 as a result of the recession. That added to the deficit-- defined as the difference between the money the federal government takes in and the amount of money it spends each year.
In fact, before Obama took office on Jan. 20, 2009, CBO had already estimated that the 2009 deficit would be at least $1.2 trillion.
But Obama isn't off the hook. Another $200 billion was added to the deficit as result of the spending in the stimulus bill, one of Obama's first major legislative efforts.
The Verdict
This PoliGraph test is misleading.
It's true that Obama's first two years in office were marked by trillion dollar deficits and debt. However, it's misleading for Pawlenty to pin blame on Obama when, in fact, Obama inherited big spending increases and massive revenue shortfalls from his predecessor.
SOURCES
The Center on Budget and Policy Priorities, Policy Basics: Deficits, Debt, and Interest, accessed Jan. 22, 2010
Bloomberg News, U.S. Deficit for 2009 Totals $1.4 Trillion, Budget Office Says, By Brian Faler and Julianna Goldman, Oct. 8, 2009
The Congressional Budget Office, Monthly Budget Review: Fiscal Year 2009, Nov. 6, 2009
The Congressional Budget Office, Revenues, Outlays, Deficits, Surpluses, and Debt Held by the Public,1970 to 2009, in Billions of Dollars, January 2010
The Congressional Budget Office, Monthly Budget Review: Fiscal Year 2009, Oct. 7, 2009
The Congressional Budget Office, Monthly Budget Review: Fiscal Year 2010, Oct. 7, 2010
The Congressional Budget Office, The Budget and Economic Outlook: Fiscal Years 2009 to 2019, Jan. 7, 2009
The Cato Institute, Don't Blame Obama for Bush's 2009 Deficit, by Daniel J. Mitchell, Nov. 19, 2009
The Treasury Department, The Debt to the Penny and Who Holds It, accessed Jan. 22, 2010
Interview, Alex Conant, spokesman, Gov. Tim Pawlenty, Jan. 20, 2010
Interview, Jim Horney, Director of Federal Fiscal Policy, Center on Budget and Policy Priorities, Jan. 23, 2011
Interview, Daniel Mitchell, Senior Fellow, Cato Institute, Jan. 23, 2010
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 2:00 PM on January 25, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(3 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph, Tim Pawlenty
This is the second in a series of fact checks this week reviewing the book of former Gov. Tim Pawlenty - Courage to Stand - as he tours the nation promoting it and exploring the possibility of a run for president.
Pawlenty frequently touts his record on taxes, so it's no surprise that he wrote about it in his new memoir, Courage to Stand.
On page 182, he writes: "Every Governor for decades had said it was important to get Minnesota at least out of the top 10 highest-taxed states. None of them ever did. I did."
Did he? Sort of. Outside of a new fee on cigarettes, between 2003 and 2010 Pawlenty didn't raise state taxes - but he didn't lower them, either.
The Evidence
There are a lot of ways to slice and dice tax rankings, and in each case Minnesota fares differently when calculating the top 10 highest.
For instance, according to the Minnesota Department of Revenue, Minnesota has ranked 11th or above since 2004 in total state and local taxes. When it comes to the individual income tax, the same data show that Minnesota has remained well within the top 10 since 1995.
Meanwhile, the Tax Foundation, a national group that has been churning out tax rankings for years, has ranked Minnesota 11th, 12th and sometimes 17th in state and local taxes since 2000, the middle of former Gov. Jesse Ventura's administration. In some years, Minnesota fares even better according to rankings published by the Minnesota Taxpayers Association.
So, by at least a few measures, Minnesota is no longer one of the highest-taxed states in the nation. On this point, Pawlenty's correct.
The broader question is whether Pawlenty did anything to pull Minnesota out of the top 10, as he said he did.
Not exactly, say tax experts.
Former Republican Rep. Phil Krinkie, who chaired the House Taxes Committee in 2005-06 and now leads the Taxpayers League of Minnesota, pointed out that some tax tweaks occurred under Pawlenty's administration, but the most substantial changes happened during Ventura's tenure. For instance, in 1999 and 2000, the state cut income tax rates. In 2001, the general education fund levy was replaced with state aid.
Others, including Mark Haveman who is Executive Director of the Minnesota Taxpayers Association, say Pawlenty did not raise taxes while other states did to cover deficits. Minnesota, as a result, stayed clear of the top 10.
The Verdict
Saying precisely when Minnesota dropped out of the top 10 highest taxed states in the nation is hard to pin down because each ranking tells a different story. What is clear, however, is that the most significant tax cuts occurred under Ventura. Pawlenty, however, prevented taxes from going up while other states approved new revenue raisers.
Pawlenty's book implies his actions were the sole reason Minnesota dropped out of the top 10, but the Ventura administration played a major role. As a result, Pawlenty's claim is misleading.
SOURCES
State Rankings: State and Local Taxes, made using data from the Minnesota Department of Revenue found here, accessed Jan 19, 2011
State Rankings: State Taxes, made using data from the Minnesota Department of Revenue found here, accessed Jan 19, 2011
The Minnesota Department of Revenue, Frequently Asked Questions About Tax Rankings, accessed Jan. 20, 2011
The Tax Foundation, Minnesota's State and Local Tax Burden, 1977-2008, accessed Jan. 20, 2011
The Tax Foundation, State and Local Tax Burdens Dip as Income Growth Outpaces Tax Growth, by Gerald Prante, Aug. 7, 2008
The Minnesota House of Representatives, FAQ on Tax Rankings and Minnesota, January, 2008
The Minnesota Taxpayers Association, How Does Minnesota Compare?, July 2010
The Minnesota Budget Project, 1999 Minnesota Tax Cuts: How Much and for Whom?, accessed Jan. 20, 2010
The Minnesota Budget Project, Tax Changes in the 2000 Legislative Session, accessed Jan. 24, 2011
Interview, Alex Conant, spokesman for Gov. Tim Pawlenty, Jan. 20, 2011
Interview, Rep. Phil Krinkie, President, Taxpayers League of Minnesota, Jan. 20, 2011
Interview, Mark Haveman, Executive Director, Minnesota Taxpayers Association, Jan. 20, 2011
Interview, Nan Madden, Director, Minnesota Budget Projects, Jan. 20, 2011
Interview, Joel Michael, House Legislative Researcher, Jan. 24, 2011
More
The Humphrey School
Posted at 2:00 PM on January 24, 2011
by Catharine Richert
(4 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph, Tim Pawlenty
This is the first in a series of fact checks this week reviewing the book of former Gov. Tim Pawlenty - Courage to Stand - as he tours the nation promoting it and exploring the possibility of a run for president.
In the book Pawlenty writes about health care and his efforts to reduce costs in Minnesota.
He writes that he wanted to cut costs and improve results, and encourage competition by getting consumers more involved in making decisions.
Among the examples Pawlenty mentions is the Minnesota Advantage Health Plan, a program that offers lower co-pays and deductibles to state employees who visit hospitals, doctors and clinics that provide high-quality health care at a low cost.
"State employees overwhelmingly chose care from lower-cost, high-quality providers - and premium increases in the program have been relatively small or flat for five years," he wrote on page 177.
Parts of Pawlenty's claim are correct. But there are some caveats.
The Evidence
Under the Minnesota Advantage Health Plan, the state ranks health care providers according to efficiency and cost. Employee co-pays and deductibles are lowest for providers that are ranked as offering high-quality health care at low cost. Less efficient providers are ranked at higher cost levels and enrollees pay more to visit them.
Doctors, clinics and hospitals compete to be in the lowest cost category and, as a result, get more business. For the state and its employees, the program has meant lower health care costs.
So, Pawlenty's characterization of the program is on point, as is his claim about the program's popularity. Currently, about 85 percent of state employees are visiting low-cost, high efficiency providers, according to Minnesota Management and Budget.
It's also true that in 2006, 2010 and 2011, insurance premiums did not increase.
In some years, however, Advantage premiums did go up. A summary from Pawenty's office points out that these increases were frequently lower than "other large Twin Cities employers." (The summary doesn't say which employers or how many.)
But to say these increases were "relatively small" is somewhat misleading. In several instances, the average Advantage premium increase was more than the national average, according to a recent budget department analysis.
For example, in 2005, Advantage premiums went up an average of 15.1 percent compared to the national average of 9.2 percent. In 2007, the Advantage average went up 9.9 percent compared to the national average of 6.1 percent. However, overall Advantage health care premiums have been on the decline in recent years.
There's also one key point to make about Minnesota Advantage that may be lost on readers of Pawlenty's book: He didn't start the program. Rather, Minnesota Advantage was the result of negotiations between state employee labor unions and management; it was launched in 2002, the year before Pawlenty took office.
That said, bargaining between labor and MMB continued during the Pawlenty administration, and further changes were made to the program that have helped make Minnesota Advantage more cost effective.
The Verdict
It was close, but the PoliGraph rates this claim as accurate.
Pawlenty is correct that many Minnesota Advantage participants have chosen low-cost, high-quality providers. And he's right that premiums haven't increased at all in some years.
That said, it's important to note that while premium increases have been on the decline in recent years, they have spiked higher than the national average in some instances. Furthermore, Pawlenty does not make clear that Minnesota Advantage actually started before he took office in 2003.
SOURCES
Courage to Stand, by Tim Pawlenty
Summary of changes to the state employee health plan under the Pawlenty administration
Office of the Legislative Auditor, State Employee Health Insurance, Feb. 2002
Minnesota Management and Budget, Minnesota State Employee Group Insurance Program: Biennial Report, 2007-2008, accessed Jan. 21, 2011
Minnesota Management and Budget, Minnesota Advantage Health Plan 2011, Benefits Schedule, accessed Jan. 21, 2011
The Council of State Governments 2004 Innovations Award Program, Application Form from Minnesota Advantage Health Plan, accessed Jan. 18, 2011
Minnesota Association of Professional Employees Letter to President Barack Obama, Feb. 22, 2010
Interview, Alex Conant, spokesman, Gov. Tim Pawlenty
Interview, Barbara Holmes, Assistant Commissioner and State Labor Negotiator, Minnesota Management and Budget, Jan. 20, 2011
Interview, Jim Monroe, Executive Director, Minnesota Association of Professional Employees, Jan. 18, 2011
Interview, Peter Benner, Former Executive Director, American Federation of State, County and Municipal Employees Council 6, Jan. 18, 2011
More
Posted at 12:30 PM on October 29, 2010
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
The Minnesota DFL Party is going after Independence Party gubernatorial candidate Tom Horner's tax plan.
An ad posted on the party's website claims that his proposal to lower the deficit will "raise taxes on every middle-class Minnesotan," by taxing items used by students and babies, essentials such as heating oil and water - even prizes at the state fair.
It's true that Horner would have to tax many new items to lower the deficit. Trouble is, he hasn't said what.
The Evidence
Horner says he wants to lower the sales tax rate by 1 percent. At the same time, he wants to expand the base to some things that are exempt from taxation, such as clothing and services.
All told, Horner aims to bring in $1.3 billion per biennium in new revenue. According to the Minnesota Department of Revenue, Horner has to expand the sales tax base by at least 34 percent to make that much cash. While he's got some wiggle room in how he structures the plan - for instance, groceries, prescription drugs, medical devices, business-to-business services, and other things Horner's said he won't tax, could remain exempt - it's true that he'll have to expand the sales tax base quite a bit to make $1.3 billion.
That said, Horner hasn't detailed his plan, and that's why the DFL ad is misleading.
It lists myriad things, such as school text books ($47.6 million in new revenue after the 1 percent reduction in the overall sales tax), residential heating oil ($240.5 million in new revenue) and baby products ($854,000 in new revenue), that Horner would have to tax to come up with the cash - none of which Horner has said specifically he would tax.
Further, many of the items featured in the ad would generate very little revenue; for instance, taxing automatic fire sprinklers would bring in about $512,400 - less than one percent of the $1.3 billion Horner pledges to raise. Additionally, the revenue department generally considers such items business purchases, which Horner says he won't tax.
The broader point of the ad is that Horner's tax plan would unfairly hurt the middle class. And the conventional wisdom is that sales taxes hit lower income earners harder.
But again, a lot depends on what Horner decides to tax, according to Roberton Williams, a senior fellow at the Urban Institute in Washington, D.C. If the plan includes clothes or food that many people, rich or poor, buy, the sales tax becomes more regressive. If it's items that wealthier people buy, the tax is more progressive, he said.
And while Horner has said he will tax clothes, he's pledged to adopt a tax holiday, give a tax credit or keep purchases under $100 tax-free to ensure middle and lower income Minnesotans aren't burdened by the levy. That fact is left out of the DFL ad.
The Verdict
It's true that Horner wants expand the sales tax, and it's likely many things that are not taxed now will be taxed in the future if he becomes governor. However, the DFL ad is misleading on two points: it assumes that Horner will tax things he hasn't said he would tax. Further, it fails to mention that Horner has a plan to make the sale tax less burdensome for middle-and-lower income Minnesotans.
This PoliGraph test is inconclusive.
Sources
The Minnesota DFL, Tom Horner's "Clear Vision": Raising Taxes on the Middle Class, accessed Oct. 28, 2010
Tom Horner for Governor, Minnesota Works: The Horner-Mulder Budget, accessed Oct. 28, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, Horner's tax plan typical in most of U.S., by Mark Zdechlik, Oct. 8, 2010
The Minnesota Department of Revenue, Sales Tax Base Broadening and Rate Reduction, Sept. 27, 2010
The Minnesota Department of Revenue, State of Minnesota Tax Expenditure Budget: Fiscal Years 2010-2013, February 2010.
The Uneasy Case for Extending the Sales Tax to Services, by Kirk J. Stark, University of California, Los Angeles - School of Law, March 24, 2003
Matt Lewis, spokesman, Tom Horner, Oct. 28, 2010
Kristen Sosanie, spokeswoman, Minnesota DFL, Oct. 28, 2010
Roberton Williams, senior fellow, The Urban Institute, Oct. 28, 2010
Morgan Holcomb, law professor, Hamline University, Oct. 28, 2010
More
Posted at 12:30 PM on October 27, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(4 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
The new federal health care law has cropped in attack ads, in speeches, and most recently in a three-way debate between the gubernatorial candidates.
Republican Tom Emmer said the law is flawed because it's a federal intrusion on state's rights. He said the law includes a lot of surprises unrelated to health care policy.
"I had somebody approach me yesterday who said, 'Do you realize that in the federal health care bill that every real estate transaction I'm going to have to pay money into the federal health care bill to pay for it,'" Emmer said in a response to a question about his take on a legal effort to overturn the law. "On every real estate transaction. What else are we going to find out over the next few weeks?"
Emmer goes wrong in his claim by saying that "every" real estate transaction will be taxed. In fact, it appears that very few Americans will be saddled with the new duty.
The Evidence
Emmer's staff did not respond to PoliGraph's requests for more information on this claim, but it appears Emmer's talking about an obscure provision in the law that imposes a 3.8 percent tax on money that's made from investment income, which can include rental property and home sales.
Congress's Joint Committee on Taxation estimates the tax will bring in $210 billion between 2013, when the levy kicks in, and 2019; the funds will be used to pay for Medicare.
But the tax comes with some important criteria.
First, it only applies to individuals making more than $200,000 annually and couples making more than $250,000 annually.
Further, profits on primary residences less than $250,000 for individuals and less than $500,000 for couples are already exempt from taxation.
So, for instance, a couple would have to make more than $250,000 a year and sell their home for more than $500,000 before the tax would become an issue.
It's hard to say precisely how many people will be subject to the new tax. But what is clear is that the burden will fall on a narrow sliver of the population.
In Minnesota, less than 10 percent of households make more than $200,000 annually. And the average price of a home in the state is roughly $150,000. Nationally, the conservative Tax Foundation predicts the tax will only hit the wealthiest 2 percent of families.
The Verdict
There's a bit of truth to Emmer's claim because there is a new tax in the health care bill that could apply to real estate transactions. But Emmer has blown the impact of the new tax way out of proportion by saying every real estate transaction will be taxed. In fact, it appears relatively few will.
That exaggeration makes this claim false.
Sources
Minnesota Public Radio News, KSTP debate, Oct. 24, 2010
Thomas, Health Care and Education Reconciliation Act of 2010, accessed Oct. 26, 2010
The Joint Committee On Taxation, Technical Explanation Of the Revenue Provisions Of The "Reconciliation Act Of 2010," As Amended, In Combination With The "Patient Protection And Affordable Care Act", accessed Oct. 26, 2010
AARP, The New Health Care Law and Taxes on Home Sales, by Susan Jaffe, Oct. 11, 2010
Kaiser Family Foundation, Summary of the new health reform law, accessed Oct. 26, 2010
The Internal Revenue Service, rules for Maximum Exclusion, accessed Oct. 26, 2010
Realtor.org, September Existing Home Sales Show Another Strong Gain, Oct. 25, 2010
The Tax Foundation, Health Care Reform: How Much Does It Redistribute Income?, by
Patrick Fleenor and Gerald Prante, April 15, 2010
The Minnesota Department of Revenue, 2009 Minnesota Tax Incidence Study, accessed Oct. 26, 2010
More
Posted at 12:00 PM on October 22, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(4 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
Not a gubernatorial debate goes by without some discussion of government aid to cities and schools.
DFL hopeful Mark Dayton raised the issue during a debate at the University of Minnesota on Oct. 15, 2010, saying state aid cuts are forcing property taxes up.
"For every dollar you cut in local government aids or in school aid from the state, property taxes go up by 67 cents," he said. "That's why property taxes in Minnesota under Gov. Pawlenty have gone from $4 billion to $7 billion."
Dayton's correct that the correlation between cuts in government aid and increasing property taxes is strong. However, it's worth pointing out that there are other reasons school and local property taxes are on the rise.
The Evidence
First, Dayton says that property taxes increase by 67 cents for every dollar the state cuts in aid.
Generally speaking, this is true, though it's important to note that this is a rule of thumb employed by the Minnesota Department of Revenue when estimating how cuts in state aid will interfere with tax revenue, not the law of the land. Eric Willette, who directs property tax research at the revenue department, says recent estimates have been on the high end because many cities are choosing not to raise property taxes in light of the ongoing recession.
The same trend is evident when it comes to per pupil school aid. Based on Department of Education data, when accounting for inflation, per pupil funding has declined by about $1,300 since 2003, and property taxes have increased by about $870 - a two-thirds increase in taxes.
Further, Dayton points out property taxes have increased from $4 billion to $7 billion in recent years. This is also true. Since Pawlenty took office in 2003, local and school property taxes have increased by about that much. (State property taxes have increased over the years, but not dramatically.)
Dayton's underlying point, that a rise in property taxes is the direct result of cuts to state aid, is fuzzier.
By all accounts, the cuts are a major contributor. However, there are other factors at play.
In counties, for instance, property taxes have been on the rise because the state has shifted some of the costs associated with taking care of the Medicaid patients and the mentally disabled to counties, says Keith Carlson, executive director of the Minnesota Inter-County Association.
Meanwhile, cities and towns are grappling with higher health care costs, home foreclosures that erode the tax base, and relatively high energy costs meaning it costs more for police and fire departments to fuel their patrol cars and fire trucks.
The Verdict
Generally, Dayton's claims are correct. It's true that for every dollar that's cut in state aid, property taxes tend to increase by about 67 cents. And these cuts have driven increases in property taxes.
That said, it's important to put this trend in context: The recession, foreclosures, and higher gas prices have all contributed to this increase as well.
All in all, Dayton's claim passes the PoliGraph test.
Sources:
The UpTake, Gubernatorial Debate at the University of Minnesota, Oct. 15, 2010
Minnesota Department of Revenue, Price of Government: State and Local Government Revenues are Forecast Through 2013, accessed Oct. 19, 2010
State of Minnesota: Office of the State Auditor, Minnesota City Finances, 2008 Revenues, Expenditures, and Debt, Dec. 31, 2008
Minnesota2020, When It Comes to School Finances, No News is Not Good News, by Jeff Van Wychen, Aug. 23, 2010
Interview, Eric Willette, Property Tax Research Director, Minnesota Department of Revenue, Oct. 19, 2010
Interview, Keith Carlson, Executive Director, Minnesota Inter-County Association, Oct. 19, 2010
Interview, Gary Carlson, Director of Intergovernmental Relations, League of Minnesota Cities Oct. 19, 2010
Interview, Jeff Van Wychen, Minnesota2020, Oct. 20, 2010
Posted at 12:00 PM on October 20, 2010
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
Minnesota's next governor will grapple with health care reform, including a new federal law that requires states to set up health insurance marketplaces.
In response to a comment made by Republican candidate Tom Emmer about increasing the competitiveness of health insurance in the state, Independence candidate Tom Horner said Minnesota needs to consider federal dollars meant to help states set up health insurance exchanges.
"Every state accepted the planning money except two: Minnesota and Alaska," Horner said. "And I think that speaks to the politics of the issue."
Horner's right: Minnesota and Alaska have so far said "no" to federal money.
The Evidence
The new health care law requires most people to have health insurance by 2014. But because some people don't have insurance through their jobs - and some people don't have jobs at all - the bill also requires that states set up so-called health insurance exchanges, virtual marketplaces where consumers and small businesses can shop for policies.
The idea is to make health insurance pricing more competitive. If the state fails to set up the exchange, the federal Department of Health and Human Services will run the operation.
Indeed, the health care bill has become a political flashpoint in Minnesota. In August, Gov. Tim Pawlenty issued an executive order barring state departments and agencies from applying for funding associated with the new law because he says it's an intrusion on state's rights. The executive order includes federal grants meant to help states get the exchanges off the ground.
On Sept. 30, 2010, the federal health department announced $49 million in such grants to 48 states and the District of Columbia.
Not included on the list? Minnesota and Alaska.
The Verdict
Horner's correct that Minnesota and Alaska are the only two states that have not applied for grants to help establish health insurance exchanges.
Sources
The UpTake, Debating at the U: MN Candidates for Governor, Oct. 15, 2010
The Christian Science Monitor, Health care reform bill 101: What's a health 'exchange'?, by Peter Grier, March 20, 2010
The Kaiser Family Foundation, Explaining Health Care Reform: Questions About Health Insurance Exchanges, April 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, Pawlenty does about-face on insurance exchange idea, by Elizabeth Stawicki, October 8, 2010
Office of the Governor, Governor Pawlenty Signs Executive Order Directing State Agencies to Decline All Discretionary Participation in Obamacare, Aug. 31, 2010
HealthCare.gov, Health Insurance Exchanges: State Planning and Establishment Grants, accessed Oct. 18, 2010
HealthCare.gov, Grant Awards List, accessed Oct. 18, 2010
More
Posted at 12:40 PM on October 15, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: U.S. MN CD3, PoliGraph
Wall Street, ethics violations and climate change are all popping up in the fight for the 3rd district's congressional seat.
PoliGraph analyzed two ads from the race between Republican incumbent Erik Paulsen and his opponent, Jim Meffert, and found the results to be mixed.
Meffert's ad against Paulsen:
Meffert is promoting an online ad that addresses Paulsen's vote on a bill meant to overhaul the financial regulation system.
"I'll never forget the way you stood up for me and voted against reform," a pen spells out in loopy cursive. "I can't thank you enough. But I'll try. XOXO, Wall Street."
This investigation will focus on whether Paulsen voted for the bill - and whether he accepted "thousands in campaign contributions from Goldman Sachs, US Bank, Citigroup, Morgan Stanley and more," as a footnote in the ad claims.
The Evidence
Like many of his fellow Republicans, Paulsen voted against the financial regulation legislation because he felt it did not solve the problems that caused the financial crisis and that it would ultimately cost taxpayers, according to his spokesman Tim Commers.
The fine print on the Meffert ad also states that Paulsen accepted campaign contributions from some of the financial institutions the new law is aimed at taming.
This is true. For instance, during this election cycle, the Goldman Sachs political action committee has contributed $2,000 to Paulsen's campaign, and the Citigroup action committee has handed over $3,000. The Morgan Stanley PAC has given Paulsen $4,000 and US Bank has donated $4,500.
Other donors include the Mortgage Bankers Association ($7,500) and the American Bankers Association ($10,000). That said, it's important to note that none of these organizations are Paulsen's top contributors.
The Verdict
Meffert claims that Paulsen voted against the financial system overhaul and that he's received thousands from financial institutions are both accurate.
Paulsen's ad against Meffert:
Paulsen's latest television spot covers a lot of ground, charging that Meffert supports higher taxes and supports cuts to Medicare. This investigation will focus on the following claims:
"[Jim Meffert] is a lobbyist who was fined for violating ethics laws," the ad states. "The energy tax Meffert favors would raise utility bills $829 a year for families."
The Evidence
Meffert was registered as a lobbyist for the Minnesota Optometric Association starting in March 1998. He terminated his registration in July 2010. So he no longer is a lobbyist as Paulsen's ad states.
It's true that Meffert caught the attention of the Minnesota Campaign Finance and Public Disclosure Board several times during his lobbying career. In 2002, he was fined $100 for filing paperwork late, according to campaign finance board executive Gary Goldsmith.
In 2003, when Meffert was treasurer of the optometric political action committee, his group was fined $2,100 for failing to file fundraising reports. (Meffert says notices from the board were lost in the mail as his organization moved offices.)
Paulsen points to a third instance to support this claim. In 2005, the optometric political action committee was referred to the Attorney General because its activity had lapsed. In short, state officials wanted to know if the committee still existed. Meffert alerted the board that the fundraising operation was still active, and the matter was resolved in early 2006.
But were these ethics violations? Goldsmith emphasized that Meffert's violations were entirely administrative, and had absolutely nothing to do with his conduct because Goldsmith's board does not deal with such issues. Further, he pointed out he and his staff issue hundreds of similar fines every year, so Meffert's failure to report on time is not unusual.
Paulsen's second claim refers to a cap-and-trade bill that the House of Representatives passed in 2009, legislation that's now stalled in the Senate. Meffert does the support the legislation, and has pledged on his website "to put a price on carbon and reduce its presence in our atmosphere, whether it is a cap-and-trade system, a carbon tax, or some other method."
The trouble with Paulsen's claim is that it relies on one cost estimate drafted by the conservative Heritage Foundation. According to the group, policies in the bill would cost families an average of $829 annually.
Contrast that with the Environmental Protection Agency's estimate for the same bill which pegs the cost at less than $200 annually, and one thing becomes clear: experts agree that the cost of energy will necessarily increase if the United States adopts a cap-and-trade bill - they just don't agree on how much.
The Verdict
Meffert was fined during his lobbying career by the state's campaign finance board. But his violations were administrative, and have nothing to do with ethics or conduct as the ad implies. Further, his failure to report fundraising activities on time is nothing out of the ordinary. So, this part of Paulsen's claim is false.
On his second point, Paulsen misses the mark. He bases his claim that Meffert supports an "energy tax" on one estimate from a conservative foundation that's based on a stalled bill. The bottom line is that cap-and-trade legislation is still a moving target, so it's impossible to say how much it will cost consumers until Congress puts something into law.
SOURCES
YouTube, Wall Street: How Did Paulsen Vote?, accessed Oct. 14, 2010
Project Vote Smart, Erik Paulsen's voting record HR4173, accessed Oct. 14, 2010
How Did Paulsen Vote, accessed Oct. 14, 2010
HR 4173: Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act
OpenSecrets.org, Rep. Erik Paulsen: Campaign Contributions - 2010 cycle, accessed Oct. 14, 2010
Congress.org, Rep. Erik Paulsen: Political Action Committee Contributions, 2009-2010, accessed Oct. 14, 2010
The Star Tribune, Paulsen hits Meffert with a second ad, by Jeremy Herb, Oct. 8, 2010
The Minnesota Campaign Finance and Public Disclosure Board, Jim Meffert-Nelson lobbyist registration, accessed Oct. 14, 2010
The Minnesota Campaign Finance and Public Disclosure Board, Jan. 15, 2003 meeting minutes, accessed Oct. 14, 2010
The Minnesota Campaign Finance and Public Disclosure Board, April 23, 2003 meeting minutes, accessed Oct. 14, 2010
The Minnesota Campaign Finance and Public Disclosure Board, Dec. 15, 2005 meeting minutes, accessed Oct. 14, 2010
The Minnesota Campaign Finance and Public Disclosure Board, Feb. 24, 2006 meeting minutes, accessed Oct. 15, 2010
Jim Meffert for Congress, Issues: Environment, accessed Oct. 14, 2010
The Heritage Foundation, The Economic Consequences of Waxman-Markey: An Analysis of the American Clean Energy and Security Act of 2009, Aug. 6, 2009
The Environmental Protection Agency, American Clean Energy and Security Act of 2009 H.R. 2454 in the 111th Congress , June 23, 2009
PolitiFact.com, Your guide to cap-and-trade estimates, by Catharine Richert, June 25, 2009
Interview, Kate Monson, spokeswoman, Jim Meffert, Oct. 13, 2010
Interview, Tim Commers, spokesman, Erik Paulsen, Oct. 14, 2010
Interview, Gary Goldsmith, Executive Director, Minnesota Campaign Finance and Public Disclosure Board, Oct. 15, 2010
More
Posted at 12:30 PM on October 13, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(1 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: U.S. MN CD1, PoliGraph
In Minnesota's 1st Congressional District attack ads are flying fast and furious.
PoliGraph looked at two of these ads, one paid for by incumbent Tim Walz that questions his Republican opponent Randy Demmer's stance on Social Security and another paid for by the National Republican Congressional Committee, which has been funding ads aimed at electing Demmer.
Both ads focus on nuggets of truth and blow them out of proportion.
Walz's ad against Demmer:
"[Randy Demmer's] got a plan to partially privatize Social Security," a voice over in Walz's ad says as pictures of Wall Street's trading floor and senior citizens flash on the screen. "And who will profit? Wall Street, making billions in fees."
The Evidence
Demmer's website says he "does not support the privatization of Social Security." On his Facebook page and in recent interviews he has said only that the current system should be reformed for his and younger generations. Demmer spokesman Jason Flohrs says Demmer doesn't have a specific reform plan in mind.
But it appears he's backpedaled on the subject. At a Winona event in 2008, Demmer said that he'd "favor the option" of allowing people his age to dictate how their Social Security contributions are invested if that's what they wanted to do.
That's the clip that's featured in the Walz ad, and to some degree, it's been taken out of context. The entire video clip reveals that Demmer did not - and still doesn't - support taking Social Security away from seniors already benefiting from the program; Walz's ad is misleading in this regard because it features shots of older folks pouring over their benefit statements. And while Demmer pointed out that Social Security funding is strained, he was vague on how he'd reform it.
The second part of Walz's claim that Wall Street would profit from privatization relies on analysis of former President George W. Bush's 2004 plan to create personal Social Security savings accounts. Back then, some experts said that Wall Street could make money from fees associated with these accounts. But it was conjecture. And because Demmer doesn't have a plan to change Social Security, it's impossible to say whether Wall Street would profit or not.
The Verdict
While Demmer previously said he'd support allowing people control their Social Security contributions investments, he's backed off that position; PoliGraph could find no evidence that he's recently campaigned on the idea. More importantly, the Walz ad claims that Demmer has a plan to privatize Social Security. In fact, Demmer doesn't have a plan one way or another on the issue, saying only that it needs reform.
This ad is false.
NRCC ad against Walz:
"Why did Tim Walz vote for a bill that allowed more than $1.5 billion go to companies overseas," asks the voice over in the NRCC ad. "Walz helped create jobs in China. And we paid for it."
The Evidence
At issue is the $787 billion stimulus bill passed by Congress in 2009, a measure Walz voted for. Included in the legislation are tax credits and grants to develop alternative energy, including wind power, which is the subject of this ad.
As evidence to support its claim, the NRCC points to a reporting series by Russ Choma at American University's Investigative Reporting Workshop, which found that about 80 percent - or roughly $1.6 billion - of the more than $2 billion spent on renewable energy went to U.S. based wind projects owned by foreign companies.
But that's where the truth in this ad ends.
First, none of the firms featured in Choma's article are located in China. And while it's true that many wind turbine parts used in U.S. wind farms are made overseas, including China, it's false to imply that the entire $1.6 billion in the stimulus bill went there.
Further, the ad neglects that new wind projects in the U.S. - financed by foreign companies or by American companies - create jobs locally, a point that the Department of Energy has gone to great length to point out. It's hard to pin down precisely how many jobs local wind projects have created, but the American Wind Energy Association estimates that stimulus money helped create or save upwards of 40,000 jobs in 2009.
The Verdict
The NRCC ad correctly states that roughly $1.6 billion in stimulus dollars have gone to foreign companies operating wind farms in the U.S. However, the rest of this ad is highly misleading because it implies that all that money has gone to China, which is not true.
Further, those stimulus dollars do create or save jobs in the U.S.
This ad is misleading enough to also rate a false on the PoliGraph test.
Sources
YouTube, "Lost," accessed Oct. 12, 2010
YouTube, Randy Demmer on Social Security, accessed Oct. 12, 2010
Randy Demmer for Congress, Minnesota Values, accessed Oct. 12, 2010
Tim Walz for Congress, "Lost" fact sheet, accessed Oct. 12, 2010
The Austin Post Bulletin, Clearing up Demmer's stance on Social Security, by Heather J. Carlson Sept. 8, 2010
Randy Demmer's Facebook page, accessed Oct. 12, 2010
MSNBC, Wall Street steers clear of Social Security debate, by Martin Wolk, Dec. 28, 2004
SIA Research Reports, Dec. 8, 2004
YouTube, "Tim Walz - Part of the Problem," accessed Oct. 12, 2010
Clerk of the House of Representatives, Roll Call Vote 70 on HR 1, Feb. 13, 2009
The American Wind Energy Association, Job Creation and Recovery Act Funding, Nov. 18, 2009
PolitiFact.com, Palin claims that most of the renewable energy stimulus dollars have gone to Chinese turbinemakers, by Catharine Richert, Feb. 23, 2010
Recovery.Gov, Agency Summary: The Department of Energy, accessed Oct. 12, 2010
The Investigative Reporting Workshop, Blown Away: Wind Energy Grants Under the Stimulus Program, by Russ Choma, Feb. 8, 2010
The Investigative Reporting Workshop, Blown Away: Overseas firms collecting most green energy money, by Russ Choma, Oct. 29, 2009
The Investigative Reporting Workshop, Blown Away: Foreign Countries Control Wind Manufacturing, by Russ Choma, Feb. 8, 2010
Politico, Stimulus Money Goes Overseas, by Meredith Shiner, March 3, 2010
Department of Energy Facebook page, Nov. 20, 2009
The New York Times, Wind Farm Deal Assures Bigger U.S. Role, By Matthew L. Wald, August 6, 2010
The American Wind Energy Association, U.S. Wind Energy Industry Installs 539 MW In First Quarter, April 29, 2010
Interview, Sara Severs, spokeswoman, Tim Walz, Oct. 12, 2010
Interview, Jason Flohrs, spokesman, Randy Demmer, Oct. 12, 2010
Interview, Tom Erikson, spokesman, National Republican Congressional Committee, Oct. 11, 2010
More
Posted at 12:30 PM on October 8, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(4 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
Republican gubernatorial candidate Tom Emmer pledges to cut the corporate income tax if he's elected, which he argues stifle Minnesota's economy.
Here's what he had to say about the matter during a recent interview with Minnesota Public Radio's Gary Eichten:
Minnesota's corporate tax rate is "actually third highest in the country," Emmer said on Oct. 5, 2010. "When it's combined with the federal corporate tax, I believe it's the third highest in the world."
Emmer's facts are in the ballpark, but as with most things involving taxes it's more complicated than it appears on first glance.
The Evidence
Minnesota has a flat corporate tax rate of 9.8 percent, which Emmer wants to lower to 3 percent by 2015. He's right that the current rate is quite high compared to other states. Iowa comes in first with a 10 to 12 percent rate on corporations making more than $100,000 annually. Pennsylvania is next, followed by the District of Columbia. Minnesota comes in fourth when accounting for Iowa's two top brackets, so Emmer is close enough on his first point.
For the second part of his claim, Emmer relies on numbers produced by Organization for Economic Co-Operation and Development, an international group that collects and compiles data about developed countries. While their list excludes many smaller countries, it's common for experts, including the Congressional Budget Office, to use their data when comparing the U.S. corporate tax rate to other countries.
By this measure, Emmer is also correct: At a little more than 39 percent, the U.S. has the highest corporate tax rate in the world. Combined with Minnesota's of 9.8 percent, the state has one of the highest in the world.
Nevertheless, all these numbers deserve some context.
Experts argue that the U.S. statutory rate is misleading because the tax code contains all sorts of credits and deductions that companies take advantage of. So, it's unlikely that many businesses are actually paying the full amount. In any event, businesses frequently pass these tax costs on to consumers in the form of higher prices or employees in the form of lower wages.
Another interesting twist to this story: It's actually Minnesota's property tax that hits corporations the hardest. In 2009, businesses paid about $3.6 billion in property taxes and only $800 million in corporate income taxes, according to a study published by the Center on State Taxation.
The Verdict
Emmer is a little off on his numbers, but close enough to pass this test.
Sources
Minnesota Public Radio News, Midday interview with Rep. Tom Emmer, Oct. 5, 2010
Tom Emmer for Governor, The Emmer Budget Plan, accessed Oct. 7, 2010
The Tax Foundation, State Corporate Income Tax Rates, 2000-2010, accessed Oct. 7, 2010
The Tax Foundation, Facts on Minnesota's Tax Climate, accessed Oct. 8, 2010
Federation of Tax Administrators, Range of State and Corporate Income Tax Rates, accessed Oct. 7, 2010
The Congressional Budget Office, Corporate Income Tax Rates: International Comparisons, November 2005
The Council on State Taxation, Total state and local business taxes: State-by-state estimates for fiscal year 2009, March 2010
The Center for Budget and Policy Priorities, Putting U.S. Corporate Taxes in Perspective, by Chye-Ching Huang, Oct. 27, 2008
MinnPost.com, How does Minnesota stack up in business taxation? Pretty well, it turns out, By Sharon Schmickle, Aug. 24, 2010
MN2020, Governor Gets it Wrong on Business Taxes, by Jeff Van Wychen, accessed Oct. 7, 2010
Interview, Carl Kuhl, spokesman, Emmer for Governor, Oct. 7, 2010
Posted at 12:02 PM on October 6, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(3 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
MN Forward, a group backing business-friendly candidates, is airing a new ad attacking Mark Dayton's tax plan.
"Dayton will raise job killing taxes by $5 billion," says a voice over in the ad, which features wailing children clearly upset by Dayton's tax plan. "That's more than $2,300 in new taxes per Minnesota family."
Dry your tears, kids. These claims are false.
The Evidence
MN Forward spokesman Brian McClung points to an article written by Minnesota Public Radio's Tim Pugmire last June, when Dayton was still vying to win the DFL primary. At the time, Dayton hadn't released many details about his tax plan, only that he was going to raise taxes on the wealthiest Minnesotans and that he wanted to raise $5 billion to cover the state's deficit.
Since then, Dayton has changed his tax proposal because his first wouldn't have raised enough money. Now, Dayton wants to increase the income tax rate on the state's wealthiest to 10.95 percent, which will bring in about $1.9 billion over two years.
All told, Dayton plans to raise about $3.7 billion by raising taxes, closing corporate tax loopholes and building a state-owned casino at the Mall of America, and save about $1.2 billion by trimming government spending.
So, MN Forward is using old data to root its claim. But even if it was true, would it mean "more than $2,300 in new taxes per Minnesota family?"
No.
McClung said MN Forward came up with that figure by dividing $5 billion by the more than 2.1 million households in the state. The math works out, but it's grossly misleading because it implies that every family would pay $2,300 in new taxes, which is false; Dayton's plan - past and present - only targets a sliver of the state's population.
The Verdict
The MN Forward ad uses old data to make false claims. It fails the PoliGraph test.
Sources
MN Forward, "Still Sad?", Oct. 2, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, DFL candidates for governor trade barbs over taxes, June 9, 2010
Mark Dayton for Governor, Taxes & Budget Plan, accessed Oct. 4, 2010
Minnesota Department of Administration, Minnesota population estimates: number and characteristics of the current population, accessed Oct. 5, 2010
Minnesota Department of Revenue, 2009 Tax Incidence Study, accessed Oct. 4, 2010
Interview, Brian McClung, Oct. 2, 2010
Posted at 12:00 PM on October 1, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
Part of Mark Dayton's revised budget plan involves dramatic reductions in how much the government spends on private sector contracts.
"State agencies spent over $850 million on outsourced professional and technical services during the 2008-09 biennium," Dayton's plan states. "Cutting this outsourcing in half would thus save $425 million."
Dayton's correct that the state spends about that much on outsourcing annually. But is it realistic to slice spending in half?
The Evidence
During the last biennium, the state spent more than $862 million on private sector contracts - or roughly $431 million each year - according to data pulled from the Minnesota Management and Budget website. This money was spent on a range of services, including road and bridge repair, computer programming, correctional facility management and payroll administration. So, Dayton's figures are in the ballpark.
Dayton hasn't detailed the contracts he'd like to cut, but his staff points to a recent study done by the Wisconsin Legislature that found outsourcing waste and says a similar Minnesota assessment could show that some projects are unnecessary.
Even so, making these cuts may be easier said than done because many contracts provide the state with essential services. In fact, the state requires that agencies or departments prove that "no current state employee is able and available to perform the services called for by the contract" before putting a project up for bid.
Some of the most substantial private sector contracting occurs at the Minnesota Department of Transportation. Between 2008 and 2009, MnDOT spent more than $120 million on contracts to rebuild roads and bridges, and is slated to spend about $73 million in 2010.
The state relies heavily on the private sector for road construction. Firms bid competitively on contracts to repair bridges and roads in the state, and the winning bidder hires workers to do the actual repairs. According to David Semerad, Chief Executive Officer and Director of the Associated General Contractors of Minnesota, upwards of 20,000 people are hired for these jobs in a typical road construction year.
According to government data, here's a sampling of other essential contracts:
โข A contract between the Department of Corrections and Correctional Medical Services, a company that provides medical, psychiatric, and pharmaceutical services to the state's 10 prison facilities, care required by the state. Between 2008 and 2009, the corrections department spent $46 million on the contract.
โข A contract between Minnesota State Colleges and Universities and US Bank to process credit card-based payment by students of tuition and fees, which cost roughly $3.5 million in the last biennium. According to Linda Kohl, a spokeswoman for MnSCU, such contracts are standard at many higher education institutions. "We use a contract because US Bank has far more expertise in student private banking data issues than we do," she said.
โข An $8.2 million contract between the Department of Employment and Economic Development and Bearingpoint Inc (now Delloite Consulting) to maintain the state's unemployment benefits website. The site is where people go to file for the benefits, and is the only fully automated system in the country, according to department spokeswoman Kirsten Morell.
The Verdict
Dayton's correct that the state spends approximately $850 million per biennium on outsourcing. And cutting such activity in half could save the state more than $400 million.
But in practice, Dayton's plan appears difficult to implement. Many of the state's contracts provide essential services that the state would still have to supply one way or another. Further, Minnesota law requires departments and agencies prove no state workers can take on these tasks before they contract with a firm.
Dayton's claim is inconclusive.
Sources
Mark Dayton for Governor, Mark Dayton's Revised Budget Plan, Sept. 21, 2010
Dayton campaign fact sheet on outsourcing
Minnesota Management and Budget, contractor spending 2008, created Sept. 29, 2010
Minnesota Management and Budget, contractors spending 2009, created Sept. 29, 2010
Correctional Medical Services, Locations: Minnesota, accessed Sept. 30, 2010
The Pew Center on the States, States Buying Smarter: Lessons Learned from Minnesota and Virginia, May 2010
Minnesota Office of the Revisor Statutes, 16C.08 Professional or Technical Services, accessed Sept. 30, 2010
The Milkwaukee Sentinal Journal, Use of outsourcing by state soars, audit shows, By Patrick Marley, May 12, 2009
Interview, Katharine Tinucci, spokeswoman, Mark Dayton, Sept. 28, 2010
Interview, David Semerad, Chief Financial Officer, Associated General Contractors of
Minnesota, Sept. 30, 2010
Interview, Shari Burt, Communications Director, Minnesota Department of Corrections, Sept. 30, 2010
Interview, Linda Kohl, Associate Vice Chancellor for Public Affairs, Minnesota State Colleges and Universities, Sept. 30, 2010
Interview, Kirsten Morell, spokeswoman, Department of Employment and Economic Development, Sept. 30, 2010
Posted at 12:30 PM on September 29, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(1 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
Minnesota's next governor will face a major problem when he takes office: the deficit.
For his part, Independent Tom Horner says that, despite projected increases in revenue, the state won't have any extra cash.
"We don't have $2 billion extra," he said during the Sept. 7, 2010, debate in Duluth in response to his opponent Republican Tom Emmer's claim that the state will be working with a revenue surplus next year. "[The state] already spent it."
Horner's claim is on the money.
The Evidence
It's true that the state will have more cash in the next biennium. According to Management and Budget, revenues are projected to increase from nearly $31 billion to about $33 billion - roughly a 7 percent increase.
But revenue only tells one side of the story, as Horner points out.
In the next biennium, spending is slated to increase to $38.7 billion, leaving a gap between revenue and expenditures of roughly $5.8 billion, otherwise known as the deficit. Republican Emmer has outlined a budget plan that cuts real and projected spending growth but hasn't detailed how he would account for a growing demand for state services.
There are two key pots of money being moved around that make these budget contortions even trickier. In this biennium, the state got about $2 billion in federal stimulus funding that helped pay for education and health care. The one-time cash transfer effectively allowed the state to spend more without drawing down general funds in the current fiscal year.
This funding disappears in the next biennium, but is nevertheless included in projected spending for the state. And it's unlikely that lawmakers are going to find an additional $2 billion to fill the hole.
Add to that the $1.4 billion the state is obliged by law to repay schools in the next biennium, and the deficit begins to take shape. (Emmer and Horner have both said they will push back payment to the 2014-2015 biennium.) The rest of the deficit reflects recent cuts made to balance the budget and cost increases associated with a growing, aging population.
The Verdict
Though revenue is going up in the next biennium, Horner says that the state won't really have an extra $2 billion extra to play with. And he's correct: that federal funding disappears in the next budget cycle.
This claim is accurate.
Sources
Duluth debate, Sept. 7, 2010
Minnesota Management and Budget, Price of Government, May 2010
Minnesota Management and Budget, General Fund Balance Analysis: End of 2010
Legislative Sessions, accessed Sept. 28, 2010
The Minneapolis Star Tribune, That deficit is a demon, and Emmer doesn't want to face it, by Lori Sturdevant, Aug. 28, 2010
Minnesota 2020, Emmer's Faux Claims on Revenue, Spending Growth, by Jeff Van Wychen, Sept. 15, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, Tax increases in Dayton, Horner budget plans; Emmer downplaying deficit, by Tom Scheck, Sept. 1, 2010
Interview, Tom Horner, Sept. 28, 2010
Interview, Bill Marx, Minnesota House of Representatives Chief Financial Analyst, Sept. 29, 2010
Interview, Jay Kiedrowski, Senior Fellow, the Humphrey Institute of Public Affairs, Sept. 28, 2010
Interview, Curt Yoakum, spokesman, Minnesota Management and Budget, Sept. 28, 2010
Posted at 1:00 PM on September 24, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(9 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
If Republican Tom Emmer's elected governor, he says he'll restructure the way the state parcels out money to cities to eliminate what he says has been wasteful spending in the local government aid program.
To help sell his platform, Emmer frequently points out that aid isn't spread evenly among Minnesota communities.
"I don't know how many of your viewers understand that only about half the cities in this state get any local government aid and frankly only a handful get the lion's share," he said during a debate Sept. 17, 2010.
It's a claim that he reiterated during a debate in St. Cloud Sept. 21, and that appears on part of his campaign website called EmmerTruth, meant to refute misinformation about the platform.
There's little truth to this Emmer claim.
The Evidence
Emmer's campaign said it could not back-up his claim that only half the cities in the state get aid. In fact, most do. This year, 85 percent of communities - or 727 out of 854 communities -- will get local government aid after unallotment cuts, according to data supplied by the Minnesota State Legislature House Research Department, which tracks these payments annually.
Emmer's second point, that a handful of communities get the most money, is more complicated. This year, the state will give out $426,535,440 in local government aid. Nearly half of that - about $200 million - goes to 14 cities, including Duluth, Minneapolis, St. Cloud, St. Paul, and Winona.
However, Emmer's statement glosses over some important context. Local Government Aid was created to help towns with limited tax bases provide services to its residents. Funding is doled out based on a city's fiscal needs and its ability to pay for them, as well as other factors, including population. So on one hand, it makes sense that large cities, like St. Paul or Minneapolis, would be getting a lot of money.
But dollar amounts don't reveal much. To really understand how the state is spending the cash, it makes more sense to look at aid per capita. By this measure, some of the state's smallest towns are getting the most money per person. For instance, Leonidas, population 57, got $35,240 this year, which breaks down to about $618 per person. By comparison, Minneapolis, population 390,000, got $63,986,731 in local government aid - or about $164 per person.
The Verdict
Emmer's claim is fraught with inaccuracies. He's wrong that only half of Minnesota communities are getting aid. It's far more than that. And while Minneapolis and St. Paul come out on top in terms of dollars of aid, it's the smallest cities in the state that are getting the most aid per person - precisely the aim of the local government aid program.
This claim is false.
Sources
The UpTake, transcript of the TPT Almanac debate, Sept. 17, 2010
Emmer for Governor, EmmerTruth: Tom Emmer Wants to Reform, Not Eliminate, Local Government Aid, accessed Sept. 23, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, City officials gloomily expect cuts to local government aid, by Dan Olson, Sept. 17, 2010
Minnesota2020, Phony LGA Statistics at AARP Debate, by Jeff Van Wychen, Sept. 21, 2010
Minnesota House Research Department, Governor's December 2008 City Aid and Credit Cuts and Payments, Dec. 19, 2008
Minnesota House Research Department, 2009-2011 LGA certified and paid amounts, after the 2010 session, June 11, 2010
The Minnesota Department of Revenue, Final City Unallotment: 2009, accessed Sept. 23, 2010
The League of Minnesota Cities, Local Government Aid 101: 2009 Distribution & Beyond, updated April 2010
LGA payments by amount
LGA payments by per capita amount
Interview, Carl Kuhl, Emmer for Governor, Sept. 23, 2010
Interview, Lena Gould, Policy Analyst, League of Minnesota Cities
Interview, Jeff Van Wychen, fellow, Minnesota 2020, Sept. 23, 2010
Interview, Pat Dalton, House Research Department, Sept. 23, 2010
Posted at 1:00 PM on September 22, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(3 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
A new mailer from the Minnesota AFL-CIO links Republican gubernatorial candidate Tom Emmer to the I-35W bridge collapse.
The mailer, which features a picture of a truck and school bus tumbling toward the Mississippi River as the bridge crumbled, says, "Emmer voted three times against funds that would have repaired broken infrastructure across Minnesota, including the I-35 bridge. He even voted against the final attempt to rebuild infrastructure before the bridge collapsed."
The labor union mailer also states that, "Emmer was one of only ten representatives that voted against efforts to compensate victims of the bridge collapse" and that "Emmer opposed a $6.6 billion plan to rebuild roads, bridges, and transit throughout Minnesota even after the I-35 bridge collapse."
For the most part, these claims are true.
The Evidence
"Emmer voted three times against funds that would have repaired broken infrastructure across Minnesota, including the I-35 bridge. He even voted against the final attempt to rebuild infrastructure before the bridge collapsed."
Emmer voted against the 2007 transportation funding bill three times: the House version passed in March, a merged House and Senate version in May; and an unsuccessful effort to override Gov. Tim Pawlenty's veto of the legislation.
But there are a few important caveats to this claim. First, Emmer's opposition to the transportation bill wasn't the reason it failed. House leaders needed 90 members to override Pawlenty's veto, but only secured 83.
It's also crucial to note that there was no specific provision in the bill to update the I-35W bridge, as the AFL-CIO's claim implies. However, it would have expanded the trunk highway fund and bonds, which cover bridge repair - precisely the sources of money that might have allowed the Minnesota Department of Transportation to renovate or replace the bridge sooner.
For several years, the I-35W bridge had been on MnDOT's "Budget Buster" list, meaning it needed replacement or repair within 10 years. But according to MnDOT documents, overhauling the bridge was postponed due to funding woes.
"Emmer was one of only ten representatives that voted against efforts to compensate victims of the bridge collapse."
This claim is also true. Emmer was among a handful of members who voted against a bill that set up a $40 million compensation fund for survivors of the bridge collapse. Like his fellow Republicans, Emmer questioned whether the state could afford the fund in lean times, and he objected to a provision that allows the fund to be used to pay damages to victims of future disasters.
"Emmer opposed a $6.6 billion plan to rebuild roads, bridges, and transit throughout Minnesota even after the I-35 bridge collapse."
The final vote in question came in February, 2008. The bill, a direct result of the collapse, provided funding for road and bridge repairs and money meant specifically for the I-35W bridge. Emmer voted against this bill as well.
The Verdict
For the most part, the AFL-CIO mailer is correct. On three occasions, Emmer voted against legislation having to do with the bridge collapse or general bridge repair in the state, though it's important to note that the 2007 transportation funding bill did not specify repairs to the I-35W bridge.
Sources
AFL-CIO mailer
Minnesota State Legislature, Actions on HF 946: The 2007 Omnibus Transportation Bill, accessed Sept. 21, 2010
Minnesota State Legislature, House Journal: March 24, 2007, p. 2016, accessed Sept. 21, 2010
Minnesota State Legislature, House Journal: May 14, 2007, p. 6640, accessed Sept. 21, 2010
Minnesota State Legislature, House Journal May 21, 2010, p. 7571, accessed Sept. 21, 2010
Minnesota House of Representatives Research, Summary: HF 946, May 11, 2007
The Minnesota State Legislature, Investigative Report to Joint Committee to Investigate the I-35W Bridge Collapse, Gray, Plant, Mooty, May 2008
MN2020, 451 Minnesota Bridges "Functionally Obsolete" By Conrad deFiebre, Aug. 2, 2007
The Minneapolis Star Tribune, House OKs $40 million for bridge survivors, by Pat Doyle, Feb. 29, 2008
The Minnesota State Legislature, Actions on HF 2553, accessed Sept. 21, 2010
The Minnesota State Legislature, House Journal May 5, 2008, p. 11270, accessed Sept. 21, 2010
The Minnesota State Legislature, Action on HF2800, accessed Sept. 21, 2010
The Minnesota State Legislature, House Journal Feb 21, 2008, p. 7884, accessed Sept. 21, 2010
Interview, Chris Shields, Communications Director, Minnesota AFL-CIO, Sept. 21, 2010
Interview, Margaret Donahoe, Executive Director, Minnesota Transportation Alliance, Sept. 2, 2010
Posted at 12:40 PM on September 17, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: U.S. House, PoliGraph
DFL State Sen. Tarryl Clark's latest challenge to her opponent Rep. Michele Bachmann goes something like this: cut your salary and budget because I cut mine.
The challenge comes in a new Clark television ad and letter launched Sept. 15.
"When Minnesota faced a record budget deficit, I cut my legislative compensation and budget," Clark said in the ad.
In a separate letter to Bachmann on the same subject, Clark wrote, "You spend more taxpayer dollars on campaign-style mailings and radio ads than any Minnesota Member of Congress. You spend more taxpayer money on self-promoting media staff than on legislative staff."
Clark gets two of these three claims wrong.
The Evidence
"When Minnesota faced a record budget deficit, I cut my legislative compensation and budget."
In the 2007-2008 biennium, Clark made about $102,380, including base salary, a leadership bonus and per diem. This biennium, Clark trimmed her per diem spending by $13,316, or about 13 percent, for a total salary of $89,064. She also declined a communications budget, among other things.
"You spend more taxpayer dollars on campaign-style mailings and radio ads than any Minnesota Member of Congress."
Clark is talking about money Bachmann spends on constituent communications regarding congressional business - her "franking" privileges, which are paid for with public funds. This claim does not concern campaign mailers, which are covered by campaign coffers, not taxpayer dollars, though Clark's staff points out that some of Bachmann's fliers are fancy, full-color spreads that tout her accomplishments.
In late 2009, several articles were written about how much the delegation spends on mail after the U.S. House of Representatives published its first quarterly report on the subject. Indeed, between July 1, 2009 and Sept. 30, 2009, Bachmann spent more than any other member on franking expenses.
But there's more current data available. For the entire congressional session, which includes July 2009 through June 2010, Bachmann comes in fourth behind Reps. Erik Paulson, John Kline, and Tim Walz. During this period, Bachmann spent $171,521 of her more than $2 million budget on franking costs. Paulson, in comparison, spent $262,716 of his more than $2 million budget on constituent mail.
"You spend more taxpayer money on self-promoting media staff than on legislative staff."
Clark's also wrong that Bachmann spends more on her media staff than on her legislative staff. According to Legistorm, a website that tracks Hill staffer salaries on a quarterly basis, Bachmann has so far spent $184,989 on legislative staff this congressional session.
During the same period of time, she's spent only $174,551 on press staff. Narrowing the search to 2009 or the first two quarters of 2010, it's the same story: Bachmann spent more money on legislative staff than on press staff.
The Verdict
Clark has cut her own salary and budget. But the record shows that Bachman is not the biggest spender when it comes to mail. And she's never spent more on her media staff than on her legislative staff.
Sources
Tarryl Clark for Congress, "Challenge," accessed Sept. 16, 2010
Tarryl Clark for Congress, open letter to Rep. Michele Bachmann, accessed Sept. 16, 2010
Tarryl Clark for Congress, The Bachmann Agenda: Self-Promoting at Taxpayers, accessed Sept. 17, 2010
Minnesota Independent, Bachmann a member of House's million-franking club, by Chris Steller, Dec. 4, 2009
The Star Tribune, A look at the MN delegation's office expenditures, by Eric Roper, Dec. 1, 2009
The Congressional Research Office, Franking Privilege: Historical Development and Options for Change, Dec. 5, 2007
The U.S. House of Representatives, Statement of Disbursements: July 1, 2009-Dec. 31, 2009, accessed Sept. 16, 2010
The U.S. House of Representatives, Statement of Disbursements: January 1, 2010-June 30, 2010, accessed Sept. 16, 2010
The Minnesota House of Representatives, State Elected Officials' Compensation, accessed Sept. 17, 2010
Legistorm, Rep. Michele Bachmann, staff salaries, accessed Sept. 16, 2010
Rep. Michele Bachmann's legislative staff salaries, created Sept. 16, 2010
Rep. Michele Bachmann's press staff salaries, created Sept. 16, 2010
Interview, Carrie Lucking, spokeswoman, Tarryl Clark, Sept. 16, 2010
Interview, Senate Finance, Sept. 17, 2010
Posted at 12:00 PM on September 15, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: U.S. House, PoliGraph
Seventh District congressman Collin Peterson is not your average Democrat.
The 10-term DFLer gets high marks from the National Rifle Association, plays guitar, and is more likely to be found in the halls of Congress wearing cowboy boots than Oxfords.
But a YouTube ad from Peterson's Republican opponent Lee Byberg seeks to puncture Peterson's reputation as a maverick.
"Collin Peterson knows that Minnesota's 7th District didn't support Barack Obama and his socialist agenda," states an ominous voiceover while a man lists Peterson's voting offenses on a white board. "This is why he's so careful to paint himself as a middle-of-the-road candidate... It's time to retire a lifetime politician who votes with Speaker Nancy Pelosi well over 90 percent of the time."
Byberg is correct that Peterson's recently been following the party line. But it hasn't always been that way.
The Evidence
This investigation will not rule on whether Obama has a socialist agenda, as the ad states; that's a matter of opinion. Instead, this PoliGraph test will focus on whether the ad gets Peterson's voting record right.
Generally speaking, Peterson's district is conservative. Voters there have supported Republicans in the last three presidential elections, although John McCain defeated Barack Obama by just three percentage points in the 7th in 2008.
Byberg's right that Peterson votes frequently with his party leaders. Of the 1,483 votes Peterson cast during this congressional session, he's voted with his party about 93.3 percent of the time, according to The Washington Post. That puts Peterson just above his party's average of 92.2 percent.
Peterson's so-called party unity score hasn't always been so high. During the 109th Congress, the last session before Democrats took over the House of Representatives, Peterson voted with his party only 78.7 percent of the time. Between 1995 and 1997, Peterson claimed a party unity score of 64 percent - the lowest of his career.
The Verdict
Byberg's claim is accurate: In the current session of Congress Peterson voted with his party more than 90 percent of the time.
Sources
Lee Byberg for Congress, Collin Peterson 101, accessed Sept. 14, 2010
Congressional Quarterly, Member Profile: Collin Peterson, accessed Sept. 14, 2010
The Washington Post, Votes Database: 111th Congress, accessed Sept. 14, 2010
The Washington Post, Votes Database: 109th Congress, accessed Sept. 14, 2010
The Washington Post, Votes Database: 104th Congress, accessed Sept. 14, 2010
The Wall Street Journal, In the House, It's Peterson vs. Climate Bill, by Steven Powers, June 22, 2010
Collin Peterson, Peterson Op-Ed: Amendments to Climate Change Bill Were Necessary, July 16, 2010
Congressional Quarterly, Partisanship and Presidential Support in the Bush Era, by John Cranford and Rachel Bloom, accessed Sept. 14, 2010
Posted at 2:49 PM on September 10, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(4 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
With all the talk about taxes and spending, this year's gubernatorial race is a debate over the size of Minnesota's government.
While his opponents point to the size of Minnesota's public sector workforce as evidence that government has gotten too big, DFLer Mark Dayton says the talking point is a myth.
"Minnesota ranks, according to Census Bureau, the 10th lowest state in the number of state and local government employees per capita among the states," he said during a debate in Winona Aug. 19, 2010. "It's just one of these myths that's perpetrated that we're overinflated with public employees. It just simply isn't true."
Dayton nearly hits the mark with this claim.
The Evidence
Annually, the U.S. Census Bureau measures the number of federal, state, and local civilian government employees in each state. The survey is required by law, and it's this data that Dayton's staff points to support his claim.
According to an analysis done by the American Federation of State, County and Municipal Employees, a union for many state workers, Dayton's correct. (AFSCME has endorsed Dayton for governor.)
With approximately 36,000 full-time state government employees, Minnesota has the 10th leanest workforce in the country. That translates to 71 government workers for every 10,000 people.
(It's important to note that Dayton said "per capita," not per 10,000 employees, but it's an error PoliGraph will let slide because looking at this data per capita would produce very small, not very useful numbers. For instance, per capita, there are about .007 full-time state employees for every person living in the state.)
But Dayton said state and local employees, and the AFSCME analysis excludes local government workers.
Expanding the analysis to include all state and local government employees counted by the U.S. Census Bureau nevertheless produces similar results. By this measure, Minnesota has the 12th smallest public sector workforce in the nation, with about 450 government employees per 10,000 people.
The Verdict
Dayton got a few things mixed-up with this claim, but he's well within range to say that Minnesota has one of the smallest state and local government workforces in the country.
This claim is accurate.
Sources
The U.S. Census Bureau, Government Employment and Payroll: About the Survey, accessed Sept. 10, 2010
The Star Tribune, New normal is painful for state employees, by Lori Sturdevant, 4/19/2009
PoliGraph, analysis of state and local workers, created Sept. 10, 2010
Interview, Jeremy Drucker, spokesman, Mark Dayton, Sept. 8, 2010
Interview, Mike Messina, researcher, AFSCME, Sept. 8, 2010
More
Posted at 2:00 PM on September 8, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(5 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
"Origami bird. You have great long wings to fly. Why do you sit still?"
The haiku imprinted on the sidewalk of the corner of Western Ave and Selby Ave. in St. Paul and other sidewalk poems in the Capitol city are irking Republican gubernatorial candidate Tom Emmer.
During an MPR-sponsored Sept. 3, 2010 debate at the Minnesota State Fair, Emmer promised to reform local government aid so it can't be used to pay to put poetry on the sidewalks.
"LGA should be applied to what it was intended for," he said. "It should pay for essential services defined as police and fire service and sewer and water infrastructure. That's should what it should be going for, not to etch poetry in sidewalks in St. Paul."
There's no truth to Emmer's claim.
The Evidence
Local government aid, which was put on the books nearly three decades ago, is meant to help Minnesota communities with smaller tax bases provide the same services as larger, more affluent cities. Aid is distributed based on city size and population, among other things, and it goes directly into a city's general fund.
Emmer said that local government aid was intended to pay for essential services, such as the police force and fire fighting, and often it is. But his statement implies that there are restrictions on how it can be used. In fact, local government aid can be used however a city sees fit - including sidewalk poetry.
Even so, no local government aid was used in Everyday Poems for City Sidewalk, the project that has Emmer so fired up.
Rather, the entire project is paid for by a group called Public Art St. Paul, and has been since 2008 when it began. Costs include paying Marcus Young, the artist behind the project, the graphic designers who create the poetry templates, and the poets themselves. All told, it's cost the non-profit about $80,500 since 2008, according to Christine Podas-Larson, president of Public Art St. Paul.
Emmer's staff points out that the City of St. Paul advertises the project on its website. And it's true that Public Art St. Paul and St. Paul Public Works have teamed up to support the program; it's public works employees who imprint the poems during annual sidewalk repairs, a process takes only a few minutes, Podas-Larson said.
Where does funding for the sidewalk repair come from? Not local government aid, according to the City of St. Paul. Repairs are paid for with bonds and Right of Way Assessments, a fancy name for a fee city dwellers pay to keep streets, lights and sidewalks in top shape.
The Verdict
This case is clear cut: Emmer's claim about local government aid is false.
Sources
"Origami bird," by Madeline K. Schuster
Minnesota Public Radio News, State Fair gubernatorial debate, Sept. 3, 2010
The City of St. Paul, Sidewalk poetry, accessed Sept. 7, 2010
The City of St. Paul, Sidewalk poetry FAQs, accessed Sept. 7, 2010
Minnesota Office of the Revisor of Statutes, Chapter 477A. Local Government Aid, accessed Sept. 8, 2010
The State Auditor of Minnesota, Local Government Aid and Its Effect on Expenditures, Feb. 10, 2003
City of St. Paul, 2010 Adopted Budget, accessed Sept. 7, 2010
Interview, Bob Hume, deputy chief of state for St. Paul Mayor Chris Coleman, Sept. 7, 2010
Interview, Christine Podas-Larson, president, Public Art St. Paul, Sept. 7, 2010
Interview, Pat Dalton, legislative analyst, Research Department, Minnesota House of Representatives, Sept. 7, 2010
Posted at 12:02 PM on September 3, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: U.S. House, PoliGraph
DFLer Tarryl Clark frequently criticizes Michele Bachmann for neglecting the needs of the 6th District.
Case in point: In an Aug. 20, 2010, letter to her supporters, Clark pointed out that her Republican opponent failed to bring home money to help repair a local bridge.
"Despite this threat and the lessons that should have been learned from the I-35W Bridge collapse, Congresswoman Michele Bachmann refused to secure the funding needed to replace the Highway 23 bridge, a critical transportation artery in our community," Clark wrote.
Clark's claim is essentially correct. But there's a bit more to the story.
The Evidence
In 2007, after the I-35W bridge in Minneapolis collapsed, a flurry of bridge inspections occurred across the state.
To cover emergency repairs and other transportation projects, the Legislature overrode Gov. Tim Pawlenty's veto of a massive transportation funding bill in late February of 2008. The measure included $600 million in bridge repairs.
On March 20, the DeSoto Bridge in St. Cloud - the bridge Clark is referring to - was shut down because of structural deficiencies.
The next day, Bachmann pledged to forgo earmarks, money that's set aside during the congressional appropriations process for local projects. And shortly thereafter, she told government and transportation officials that she would not renege on her promise. Instead, she said she would find other sources of funding to help rebuild the bridge.
While some area leaders expressed concern about Bachmann's "no earmarks" pledge, it appears that the Minnesota Department of Transportation wasn't so keen on federal help in the first place.
In an April 16, 2008, letter from Bachmann to Gov. Tim Pawlenty, Bachmann reiterated her resistance to earmarks for the project. But she wrote that during a conference call with the transportation department, one official "noted that [the department] does not want any congressional earmarks through the Fiscal Year 2009 federal appropriations process to finance replacement of the DeSoto Bridge. In fact, the official noted that the use of federal earmarked dollars would actually slow down the accelerated replacement plan for which our community is so desperate."
The next day, in an interview with the St. Cloud Times, transportation department spokeswoman Lucy Kender confirmed that waiting for federal funding would likely slow the rebuilding process.
Ultimately, the state relied on the transportation funding bill passed earlier in the year.
The Verdict
Though Clark glosses over the fact that the Legislature had already set aside funding for bridge repair projects, her claim is basically accurate.
Sources
Tarryl Clark for Congress, email to supporters, Aug. 20, 2010
The Minnesota Department of Transportation, Highway 23, St. Cloud, accessed Sept. 2, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio, St. Cloud dedicates new Granite City Crossing Bridge, by Ambar Espinoza, October 26, 2009
Minnesota Independent, Bachmann will forgo earmarks for Desoto bridge, by Andy Birkey, March 31, 2008
Website for Rep. Michele Bachmann, Bachmann Takes Pledge Against Pork, accessed Sept. 2, 2010
The Associated Press, Bachmann Defends 'No Earmarks' For Bridge, April 25, 2008
The St. Cloud Times, A vow for bridge funds, by Lawrence Schumacher, March 29, 2010 (subscription only)
The St. Cloud Times, MnDOT rules out earmarks, by Lawrence Schumacher, April 17, 2008 (subscription only)
The Minnesota Transportation Alliance, Minnesota's Transportation System: A Guide to the Essentials, 2008
Rep. Michele Bachmann, letter to the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, April 18, 2010
Rep. Michele Bachmann, page one: letter to Gov. Tim Pawlenty, page two: letter to Gov. Tim Pawlenty, April 16, 2008
Interview, Carrie Lucking, spokeswoman, Tarryl Clark, Sept. 1, 2010
Interview, Margaret Donahoe, Executive Director, Minnesota Transportation Alliance, Sept. 2, 2010
More
Posted at 12:39 PM on September 1, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(5 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2008: U.S. MN CD6, Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: U.S. House, PoliGraph
Beer. Bacon. Corn dogs.
What sounds like the recipe for a great day at the Minnesota State Fair is also the subject of Michele Bachmann's latest ad against her DFL opponent Tarryl Clark.
"While you're at the fair, you should know that Tarryl Clark here voted to raise taxes on your corn dog, and your deep-fried bacon and your beer," Jim the Election Guy, a fictional character featured in Bachmann's ads, tells viewers. "So, if you see Tarryl Clark while you're at the fair, just ask her: What's up with voting to tax my beer?"
Here's what's up with that: When it comes to corn dogs and bacon, Bachmann's claim is on shaky ground. But she's right that Clark voted for higher taxes on beer.
The Evidence
Bachmann's staff points to a handful of votes Clark cast during her time in the state senate as support for the claim.
Corn dogs and bacon
First, it's important to note that Minnesota's sales tax does not apply to food bought at the grocery store. But it does apply to food that is sold in restaurants or by other food vendors, including those at the state fair.
In 2008, Clark voted for a constitutional amendment that would have raised the sales tax by 3/8 of 1 percent to protect water and land - commonly known as the Legacy Amendment. After the Legislature passed it, voters approved the tax increase.
So, it's wrong to say that Clark voted for the sales tax increase. Rather, she voted to let Minnesotans vote on the Legacy Amendment.
Bachmann's campaign also points out that Clark voted twice in 2007 and 2008 respectively against amendments that would have allowed a referendum on a metro area sales tax increase meant to help pay for transportation improvements.
Bachmann reasons that, without the referendum, voters did not have the opportunity to stop the sales tax. But that's a stretch: voting against a referendum is not the same as voting for a sales tax increase on corn dogs and bacon as the ad says.
Beer
In 2009, Clark voted several times to increase taxes on beer, wine and liquor. But the legislation was vetoed, so the beer sold at the state fair is not subject to a recent tax increase as the Bachmann ad implies.
The Verdict
It's true that Clark voted for a sales tax increase on beer. But Bachmann's ad is wrong when it comes to corn dogs and bacon: Clark never voted to increase taxes on either.
Sources
YouTube, "State Fair," accessed Aug. 31, 2010
Minnesota Department of Revenue, Fact Sheet: Food and Food Ingredients, accessed Aug. 31, 2010
Michele Bachmann for Congress, Script and Fact Sheet, accessed Aug. 31, 2010
Tarryl Clark for Congress, Fact Check: Michele Bachmann Uses Voter-Approved Legacy Amendment to Attack Tarryl Clark, Aug. 31, 2010
Senate Journal, April 3, 2006, page 4525
Senate Journal, March 23, 2007, page 1267
Senate Journal, Feb. 21, 2008, page 6637
National Trust for Historic Preservation, Minnesota Clean Water, Land and Legacy Amendment, accessed Aug. 31, 2010
Senate Journal, May 8, 2009, page 4466
Senate Journal, April 24, 2009, page 2754
Interview, Zach Rodvold, campaign manager, Sen. Tarryl Clark, Aug. 31, 2010
Interview, Sergio Gor, spokesman, Rep. Michele Bachmann, Aug. 31, 2010
More
Posted at 6:09 PM on August 26, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(14 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
During a debate in Golden Valley, Tom Emmer put public sector employee salaries in his cross-hairs.
"On average, a person who works in the private sector in a job similar to that of somebody who's working in the [public] sector is making on average 30 to 40 less," the Republican gubernatorial candidate said on Aug. 26, 2010.
When it comes to national averages, he's correct. But a closer look at these numbers tells a different story.
The Evidence
Emmer's office clarified that he's talking about total employee compensation, not just salaries. He also is speaking of state and local employees, not federal workers. When overall compensation, including benefits, is taken into account, private sector employees make about $27.73 an hour while public sector employees make about $39.81 an hour, according to the most recent statistics from the Bureau of Labor Statistics. So overall, public sector employees make about 43.6 percent more in total compensation.
However, these numbers can be misleading because they include wages and how much it costs employers to provide benefits. For instance, a public sector worker is paid an average of $26.25 an hour. On top of that, it costs the government an additional $13.56 on average to cover health care, paid leave and other benefits -- for a total of $39.81 per worker.
So, it's useful to look only at hourly wages and salary. On average, private sector employees made $19.58 an hour. Meanwhile, public sector employees made $26.25 - about 33 percent more than private sector workers.
Emmer's essentially on the mark when it comes to national averages for public and private sector employment. Still, his statement is misleading for several reasons.
First, he implies that, job for job, public sector workers make 30 to 40 percent more than private sector employees. That's not necessarily true. For instance, the average state government computer programmer makes $29.70 an hour while the average computer programmer working at a private firm makes an average of $36.40 an hour. And a lawyer working for government makes, on average, 26 percent less than a lawyer working at a private firm, according to the Federal Salary Council.
In fact, the Bureau of Labor Statistics stresses that it's dangerous to compare public sector average pay to private sector average pay because the government work force is more skilled than the private sector work force, so average hourly pay is naturally lower.
The Verdict
When it comes to national averages, Emmer's correct that public sector employees make 30 to 40 percent more than their private sector counterparts. But his claim is misleading because he implies that this rule works for job-to-job comparisons; in fact, there are plenty of private sector jobs that pay more than public sector jobs. His claim is inconclusive.
SOURCES
Bureau of Labor Statistics, Employer Costs for Employee Compensation - March 2010, accessed Aug. 26, 2010
Bureau of Labor Statistics, May 2009 National Occupational Employment and Wage Estimates by ownership: State government, including schools and hospitals, accessed Aug. 26, 2010
Bureau of Labor Statistics, May 2009 National Occupational Employment and Wage Estimates by ownership: Cross-industry, private ownership only, accessed Aug. 26, 2010
Office of the Legislature Auditor, State of Minnesota: State Employee Compensation, Feb. 3, 2000, accessed Aug. 26, 2010
The Federal Salary Council, Memo: Level of Comparability Payments for January 2011 and Other Matters Pertaining to the Locality Pay Program, accessed Aug. 26, 2010
The Cato Institute, Employee Compensation in State and Local Governments, by Chris Edwards, Jan. 2010
The Heritage Foundation, Inflated Federal Pay: How Americans Are Overtaxed to Overpay the Civil Service, by James Shek, July 16, 2010
Interview, Carl Kuhl, Emmer for Governor, Aug. 26, 2010
Interview, Jim Nobles, Legislative Auditor, State of Minnesota, Aug. 26, 2010
Posted at 12:00 PM on August 26, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(7 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
In a recent gubernatorial debate in Winona, Tom Horner and Mark Dayton traded barbs over taxes.
Horner, the Independence Party's candidate, said Dayton's plan to raise taxes on the wealthiest Minnesotans would hurt small businesses.
"What Senator Dayton is proposing is not just a tax on success, it is a tax on job creators," he said on Aug. 19. "When we have most small businesses in Minnesota paying taxes at the individual income tax rate, we're now robbing their ability to make investments to retain some of their earnings and make investments in new jobs, new equipment, new technologies."
It's a claim that's often made about Dayton's tax proposal, and it falls into a gray area.
The Evidence
Defining small businesses is a sticky wicket, but for this investigation, there are two definitions that matter.
The federal Small Business Administration identifies them as operations with less than 500 employees, and counts roughly 500,000 such businesses in Minnesota. These businesses can include farms, sole proprietorships or partnerships, and about 90 percent of them report income through the individual tax return.
So, by this standard, it is correct to say most small businesses in Minnesota pay taxes at the individual income tax rate.
But this definition can be misleading because some very large corporations pay their taxes though individual tax returns and some very small organizations don't. So, to dissect Horner's larger point that Dayton's tax plan would put small businesses in a bind, it's best to look at how many people report what's known in the tax world as "flow-through income," or money that comes from business, on their individual tax returns.
By this definition, the Minnesota Department of Revenue estimates that only 8.7 percent of small businesses would be subject to the new tax rate.
If all this sounds familiar, that's because it is. During the 2010 legislative session, lawmakers debated a tax increase on couples making more than $200,000. Opponents argued that many of Minnesota's wealthiest derive some income from small business operations. They also pointed out that firms affected by the new taxes account for much of the small business income in Minnesota.
The same holds under Dayton's proposal. According to the revenue department, while only a sliver of all Minnesotans reporting flow-through income would be affected by the new tax brackets, those filers account for 64 percent of all such income.
The Verdict
Horner is correct to say that most small businesses report taxes under the individual tax return. But it's misleading to imply that Dayton's plan would hit a lot of small businesses in Minnesota. In fact, only 8.7 percent would be subject to the proposed increase. Nevertheless, that narrow slice of filers does account for a lot of the state's small business income.
This claim is inconclusive.
SOURCES
The UpTake, Coalition of Greater Minnesota Cities debate, Aug. 19, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, Tax increase would affect 7 percent of small business owners, by Mark Zdechlick, May 13, 2010
The Small Business Administration, Small Business Profile: Minnesota, accessed Aug. 24, 2010
MinnesotaBudgetBites.org, Legislature's tax plan would impact few small business owners, accessed Aug. 24, 2010
Mark Dayton for Governor, Mark's Deficit Solution, accessed Aug. 24, 2010
The Minnesota Department of Revenue, Taxes Paid by Small Business in Minnesota, accessed Aug. 24, 2010
Interview, Tom Hesse, vice president for government affairs, Minnesota Chamber of Commerce, Aug. 24, 2010
More
Posted at 2:33 PM on August 25, 2010
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
To help reduce the deficit, Independence Party gubernatorial candidate Tom Horner has proposed revamping the state's sales taxes.
Doing so will "make Minnesota's sales tax consistent with most other states," a press release on his website states.
So, how does Horner's sales tax plan stack up? It's true that his proposal would make Minnesota more like the rest of the nation.
Evidence
Horner's tax plan has several components, but in this instance he's specifically talking about his plan to lower the general sales tax and expand sales taxes to previously exempt products and services.
Currently, Minnesota has the seventh highest sales tax in the country at 6.875 percent. But Horner wants to lower that to 5.875 percent, giving Minnesota the 25th highest sales tax in the country. Doing so would put Minnesota right in the middle of the pack, with a sales tax just above the national average of about 5 percent.
It's important to note that Horner would also allow counties to increase sales taxes by half a percent to offset his proposed reductions in state aid. So, in counties that take this option, the net impact on the consumer would be a half percent reduction in the sales tax.
Unlike most states, Minnesota exempts clothing from sales tax. Horner's plan would change that. (He's also talked about expanding sales tax to other services, but hasn't detailed his ideas.)
The Verdict
Horner's claim is accurate: The sales tax reduction and the expansion of sales tax to clothing would make Minnesota more like other states.
SOURCES
Tom Horner for Governor, Horner-Mulder Release Budget Outline, accessed Aug. 24, 2010
Tom Horner for Governor, Minnesota Works: Horner-Mulder Budget, accessed Aug. 24, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, Horner outlines budget plan: Taxes, cuts, delays, by Mark Zdechlik, Aug. 23, 2010
The Federation of Tax Administrators, State Sales Tax Rates and Food & Drug Exemptions, January, 2010
Minnesota Department of Revenue, Minnesota Sales and Use Tax, accessed Aug. 24, 2010
The Minneapolis Star Tribune, Is it time to tax clothing sales?, by Baird Helgeson, March 4, 2010:
Interview, Mark Haveman, executive director, Minnesota Taxpayers Association, Aug. 24, 2010
Posted at 3:08 PM on August 19, 2010
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
The Alliance for a Better Minnesota, a labor-backed organization, has a new ad knocking Republican gubernatorial candidate Tom Emmer for missing votes during the most recent legislative session.
As an invisible red pen marks days on a calendar, the voice over asks, "What would happen if you missed one out of every five days of work for a year?"
"I wouldn't have a job," says one woman.
"My boss would kill me," says another.
"Tom Emmer missed one out of every five votes in the state legislature," the voice-over says. That's "142 missed votes in 2010 alone. Votes on education, veterans' affairs, and jobs."
The Alliance for a Better Minnesota gets its numbers right. But viewers beware: Understanding this ad requires some context.
The Evidence
Election season was already heating up when the legislature met for its 2010 session. And that means several lawmakers, including the Democratic candidate for governor, House Speaker Margaret Anderson Kelliher, and state Rep. Randy Demmer, R-Hayfield, a congressional candidate, also missed votes to campaign.
Emmer, of Delano, was among those missing in action. In 2010, House legislators cast 621 votes, including votes on big ticket issues, such as education funding, as well as non-controversial resolutions and procedural moves. Emmer missed 142 of those votes, about 20 percent - or one in five votes - during the session.
It's also true that Emmer missed votes on education issues, such as a bill to fund K-12 schools, veterans' affairs, and two votes on an employment and economic development policy bill.
So, the Alliance for a Better Minnesota is on the mark with Emmer's missed votes.
But it's still important to put this ad in context. Here's how Emmer's absences break down:
This year's session lasted a little over 14 weeks, and Emmer missed votes on 15 of those days. So, that's roughly equivalent to one day for every week the legislature met. However, he was present for some votes on eight of those days.
Furthermore, Emmer missed most of those votes on a few days clustered at the end of the session; he did not take one day off every week for the entire session as the ad implies. Emmer's campaign manager Cullen Sheehan didn't say where he was on those days, only that he takes his job "very seriously."
The Verdict
Though the Alliance for a Better Minnesota omits some context from its ad, the claim is essentially accurate. The group correctly points out that Emmer missed one out of every five votes this session. And most of those votes were indeed on significant issues facing the state, including education funding, taxes and the environment.
SOURCES
Alliance for a Better Minnesota, Really?, accessed Aug. 17, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, Some legislators skip votes to campaign, by Tom Scheck, April 22, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, Where's Emmer? DFL questions missed votes, by Tim Pugmire, May 13, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, House GOP hits back on Kelliher's missed votes, by Tom Scheck, May 13, 2010
Minnesota State Legislature, Recorded Roll Call Floor Votes By Date, 2009-2010 Regular Session, accessed Aug. 17, 2010
Alliance for a Better Minnesota, Tom Emmer's Missed Votes in 2010, accessed Aug. 17, 2010
Interview, Xavier Lopez-Ayala, spokesman, Alliance for a Better Minnesota, Aug. 17, 2010
Interview, Cullen Sheehan, campaign manager, Emmer for Governor, Aug. 17, 2010
More
Posted at 11:45 AM on August 17, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(23 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: U.S. House, PoliGraph, U.S. House
U.S. Rep. Michele Bachmann had some choice words for a recently passed $26 billion bill meant to aid states hit hard by the economic downturn.
"Taxpayer money will essentially be laundered through the public employee unions, and spent to reelect those same Democrats this fall," Bachmann said on the Aug. 10 episode of FOX News's Freedom Watch with Judge Napolitano.
The next day, she clarified her point on another FOX News program, saying, "Quite literally what will happen is this money will be shifted over to public employee unions. The unions will skim off the top; they'll put a good portion of that into political action committees."
Bachmann's claim underscores an opinion held by other Republicans that the legislation is meant to win favor with teachers and other workers during an election year. Some have argued that, because the funding will be used to maintain worker salaries, a portion of that money could end up with unions in the form of dues.
Bachmann's claim implies that state aid will literally be used to pad Democrats' campaign-funding chests. But that's not true. The money will go to states, not unions.
The bill includes rules on how the money will be administered and what it can be used for.
The Evidence
The legislation includes $10 billion to prevent teacher layoffs and about $16 billion to help states maintain expanded Medicaid coverage that was established by the federal stimulus bill.
Bachmann is vague on which "public employee unions" she's talking about, and her office did not respond to inquiries for clarification. But it appears she's referring to teachers' unions. (The Medicaid component of the bill doesn't change how the federal government matches state funding for the program.)
The $10 billion in education funding will be administered by the Department of Education. It will allocate funding to states based total population and school age population. Then, states will distribute funds to schools based on formulas. The Minnesota Department of Education has not decided how it will allocate the funds, but it's important to note that the decision will be left up to state officials, not teachers' unions.
Furthermore, the bill expressly states that the education funding must "be used only for awards to local educational agencies for the support of elementary and secondary education... for the 2010-2011 school year." The legislation also states that the money can be used only to pay school employees who would otherwise be laid-off or to rehire employees. Moreover, the funding cannot be used to pay-off state debt or for "rainy-day" funds.
The Verdict
Bachmann is wrong to say that the state aid will be "laundered" through public employee unions and used to help reelect Democrats. In fact, the bill is clear that the money can only be used to keep teachers on the payroll.
Her claim does not pass the PoliGraph test.
SOURCES
FOX Business, Rep. Michele Bachmann on Freedom Watch with Judge Napolitano, Aug. 10, 2010
YouTube, Rep. Michele Bachmann on FOX News, Aug. 11, 2010
Reuters, House Passes State Aid Bill, by Lisa Lambert, Aug. 11, 2010
THOMAS, H.R. 1586, accessed Aug. 13, 2010
Summary, The Education Jobs and Medicaid Assistance Act, accessed Aug. 13, 2010
Kaiser Family Foundation, American Recovery and Reinvestment Act (ARRA): Medicaid and Health Care Provisions, accessed Aug. 16, 2010
Department of Education, Title I -- Improving The Academic Achievement Of The Disadvantaged, accessed Aug. 16, 2010
The Washington Post, Bachmann and Angle agree: State aid is "laundered" money for Dems, by Greg Sargent, Aug. 11, 2010
Interview, Christine Dufour, spokeswoman, Minnesota Department of Education, Aug. 16, 2010
Interview, Lonnie Hartley, spokesman, Education Minnesota, Aug. 16, 2010
More
University of Minnesota Humphrey Institute
Hear Poligraph reporter Catharine Richert's conversation with Tom Crann on MPR's All Things Considered:
Posted at 12:00 PM on August 13, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(12 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, PoliGraph
A hallmark of Republican Tom Emmer's campaign for governor will be his case for smaller government.
Emmer's website says one of the shortcomings of big government is that it's replaced private sector jobs with public sector jobs.
"Today, an expansive and expensive state government has crippled our business environments and lost our greatest resource - our people," he writes. "The state's largest employers are now the State of Minnesota, our public university systems, and the federal government."
For the most part, Emmer's claim about the state's largest employers is true. His underlying point that Minnesota's economy has suffered due to the expansion of government is the source of never-ending debate among economists, and is far too complex to sort out in this investigation.
The Evidence
Emmer's campaign points to a recent study compiled by Twin Cities Business magazine, which annually ranks the state's largest employers.
The state of Minnesota is ranked first, employing 54,900 people.
The next largest employer is the Mayo Clinic, which has 37,318 people on its payroll. In third place is the federal government, which has 32,637 employees, followed by Target Corporation with 28,119 employees.
The University of Minnesota, which gets only 18 percent of its budget from the state, is in fifth place with 25,976 employees. It's important to note that the U of M is not part of the Minnesota State Colleges and Universities System, which employs about 19,500 full-and-part time workers. All told, that's 45,476 employees.
So, the entire public higher education system, which is what Emmer is talking about, ranks second.
The Verdict
While it's important to note that jobs at the universities and in government are mixed with plenty of private sector positions at the Mayo Clinic and Target, Emmer is correct that the state, schools and the federal government are among the largest employers in Minnesota.
Sources
Emmer for Governor, Bringing Back the Jobs Government Scared Off, accessed Aug. 11, 2010
Twin Cities Business Magazine, Largest Employers - Top 25, accessed Aug. 11, 2010-08-11
Minnesota State Colleges and Universities, Facts about the Minnesota State Colleges and Universities system, accessed Aug. 11, 2010
Minnesota Department of Employment and Economic Development, Breaking Down the Recession's Impact, by Kyle Uphoff, accessed Aug. 11, 2010
Minneapolis Star Tribune, Minnesota jobless rate dips to 6.8% for June, by Dee DePass, July 15, 2010
The University of Minnesota, Strategic Reductions Key to Balanced Budget, July 22, 2010
Interview, David Strom, Research Director, Emmer for Governor, Aug. 11, 2010
More
Posted at 4:29 PM on August 9, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(3 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
In their final debate before the primary Sunday night, two leading DFL candidates for governor wrangled over taxes.
House Speaker Margaret Anderson Kelliher said that former Sen. Mark Dayton's plan to raise taxes on the richest Minnesotans would give the state the highest tax rate in the country.
"We'd be higher than Hawaii," she said in the Aug. 8, 2010, debate.
"Not so, Dayton countered.
If you added $2 billion a year... you would go from 9th highest to 7th highest state in the nation," Dayton said. "We would not be the highest taxed state."
Kelliher's claim is inconclusive; Dayton's is on the money.
The Evidence
Before investigating these two claims, it's important to point out that Kelliher and Dayton are actually talking about two different things: tax rate and per capita tax burden. But both reveal important aspects of a state's tax system.
"We'd be higher than Hawaii."
Dayton has pledged to boost revenue $4 billion per biennium by making the wealthiest households in the state - those in the top 10 percent - pay their "fair share" of taxes; Dayton defines this as 12.5 percent, or the average state and local tax rate for the bottom 90 percent of earners.
Kelliher's campaign did not return PoliGraph's inquiries about her claim. But it appears she was referring to Hawaii's income tax rate, which, at 11 percent, is the highest in the country. (Minnesota's highest rate is 7.85 percent.)
Here's the rub: Dayton has not detailed his plans for changing the income tax rates on the top 10 percent. He's simply said the he wants the overall state and local tax burden to be 12.5 percent.
That said, income tax makes up a sizable portion of state and local taxes. To make the $4 billion Dayton's promised would likely require a significant income tax hike. So, it's not out of the question that Dayton's tax plan could put Minnesota's rate in front of Hawaii's.
"We would not be the highest taxed state."
Dayton points to an annual study compiled by the Washington, D.C.-based Tax Foundation to back his claim. According to the report, individuals pay about $4,688 annually in state and local taxes, making Minnesota the ninth highest in per capita state and local taxes.
Under Dayton's plan, the state would bring in about $2 billion more annually, and that means individuals would pay about $5,057 per year and Minnesota would be bumped to 7th place.
The Minnesota Department of Revenue tracks somewhat different rankings, but in any case, Minnesota would not be the highest taxed state in the country under Dayton's plan.
The Verdict
Kelliher's claim is an apples-to-oranges comparison. But it's not out of the realm of possibility that Dayton's tax plan could give Minnesota the highest tax rate in the nation. Until Dayton releases more details, Kelliher's claim is inconclusive.
On the other hand, Dayton said that Minnesota would not be the highest taxed state under his proposal. When it comes to dollar figures, he's correct.
Sources
Minnesota Public Radio News, Question by question: The final DFL debate, Aug. 8, 2010
The Tax Foundation, State Individual Tax Rates, 2000-2001, March 25, 2010
The Tax Foundation, Minnesota: State and Local Tax Burden, 1977 - 2008, accessed Aug. 9, 2010
Mark Dayton campaign website DaytonDeficitSolution.pdf
The Federation of Tax Administrators, State Individual Income Taxes, accessed Aug. 9, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, Tom Scheck interview with Minnesota Department of Revenue Tax Research Director Paul Wilson, accessed Aug. 9, 2010
Interview, Katharine Tinucci, spokeswoman, Mark Dayton, Aug. 9, 2010
Interview, Mark Haveman, executive director, Minnesota Taxpayers Association, Aug. 9, 2010
Interview, Bill Ahern, Director of Policy and Communications, The Tax Foundation, Aug. 9, 2010
Posted at 5:10 PM on August 6, 2010
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
In a July 20, 2010, Minnesota Public Radio debate, DFL gubernatorial hopefuls Margaret Anderson Kelliher and Mark Dayton sparred over the state's K-12 funding record.
Dayton said that in inflation adjusted dollars, funding for schools had declined.
Kelliher disagreed.
"In the four years that I've been Speaker, we have increased funding for K-12 education by $1.6 billion," she said.
Kelliher's correct. Education spending did rise while she was House speaker.
The Evidence
Ask Kelliher's campaign where they get their numbers, and they'll point to Minnesota Management and Budget's annual forecast.
In the 2006-2007 biennium, schools got about $12.75 billion in state aid. In the 2012-2013 biennium, funding will have increased by $1.6 billion to $14.35.
Budget experts noted that school funding figures for the next budget cycle are merely projections; the Legislature may very well approve a different level of funding.
Nevertheless, funding for K-12 has increased by $1.6 billion cumulatively since Kelliher became House Speaker in 2007.
The Verdict
Cumulatively, Kelliher is correct that the Legislature has increased school funding by $1.6 billion under her watch.
Kelliher gets a passing grade on this education spending claim.
Sources
Minnesota Public Radio News, Midmorning, July 20, 2010
Minnesota Management and Budget, Price of Government, accessed Aug. 5, 2010
Minnesota Management and Budget, General Fund, Fund Balance Analysis: February 2007 Forecast, accessed Aug. 6, 2010
Minnesota Management and Budget, General Fund, Fund Balance Analysis: November 2006 Forecast, accessed Aug. 6, 2010
Minnesota Management and Budget, General Fund, Fund Balance Analysis: End of 2010 Legislative Session, Aug. 6, 2010
Minnesota Management and Budget, General Fund, Fund Balance Analysis: November 2009 Forecast, accessed Aug. 6, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, Pawlenty uses stimulus money to reverse budget cuts, by Tim Pugmire, March 17, 2009
Posted at 11:30 AM on August 4, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(2 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
DFL hopeful Matt Entenza says he'll pull Minnesota out of No Child Left Behind if he's governor - and that his Republican opponent, Tom Emmer, won't.
"George Bush's No Child Left Behind is hurting our kids," states a voice over in a recent Entenza television ad. "Tom Emmer supports Bush's failed policy."
In fact, Emmer's never been a fan of the controversial testing program.
The Evidence
Entenza's campaign says Emmer voted against a plan to drop No Child Left Behind in 2008. And at first blush, it would seem that way.
But parliamentary maneuvering on the House floor muddied the intent of the amendment Emmer voted against. It didn't just end the program; it contained other unrelated provisions.
In early 2009, Emmer co-sponsored a bill that would have prevented implementation of No Child Left Behind.
Later that year, Emmer told Minnesota Public Radio that he opposes No Child Left Behind.
"I object to the federal government having any law that tells the state of Minnesota, more importantly parents of children in the state of Minnesota, this is how your schools are going to be run," he said on Dec. 11, 2009.
Emmer supports holding teachers accountable, spokesman Bill Walsh said. He just doesn't think the federal government should tell the state how to do it.
The Verdict
Emmer has made clear that he's opposed to No Child Left Behind. Notwithstanding the vote against the muddied House floor amendment, Entenza's claim is false.
Sources
Matt Entenza for Governor, education television ad, accessed Aug. 3, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, Interview with Tom Emmer, Dec. 11, 2009
Minnesota Public Radio News, Votetracker: Withdraw from No Child Left Behind, accessed Aug. 2, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, No love for NCLB in race for governor, by Tim Pugmire, Dec. 11, 2009
Minnesota House of Representatives, House File 614, accessed Aug. 3, 10
Minnesota House of Representatives, Journal of the House, April 28, 2008
Interview, Bill Walsh, spokesman, Tom Emmer, Aug. 3, 2010
Interview, Jeremy Drucker, spokesman, Matt Entenza, Aug. 2, 2010
Interview David Strom, research director, Tom Emmer, Aug. 3, 2010
More
Posted at 12:00 PM on July 30, 2010
by Catharine Richert
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
To reduce the state's nearly $6 billion projected deficit, DFL candidates for governor are touting plans to cut spending and increase taxes.
Among them is former U.S. Sen. Mark Dayton who wants to bring the state more revenue by increasing taxes on the richest Minnesotans.
"I'll raise $4 billion from making the richest 10 percent of the people in Minnesota pay their fair share of taxes," Dayton said July 22, 2010 during a debate with his opponents on MPR's Midmorning program.
Dayton's projection is within range, but likely on the high end.
The Evidence
Before digging into Dayton's claim, it's important to note that there's disagreement over who the richest Minnesotans really are. Dayton says they're those in the top 10 percent of earners - or households making more than $136,955 annually. His DFL opponents claim his plan will hit the middle class hardest, and have proposed increasing taxes on people who earn more than $250,000 a year.
Most Minnesota households make less than $136,955. On average, they give about 12.5 percent of their income to the state, what Dayton regularly refers to as a "fair share" of taxes.
According to projections for 2011, those in the top 10 percent of earners give the state about 10.1 percent of their income. Dayton will increase the tax rate on these earners to 12.5 percent as well, which would bring in about $3.8 billion more each biennium.
What about that extra $200 million?
"Mark has said consistently that his aim is to make taxes slightly progressive," Dayton policy director Brian Klaas wrote in an e-mail. "That would account for the difference."
Back in December of 2009, Minnesota Department of Revenue tax research director Paul Wilson, told Minnesota Public Radio's Tom Scheck that Dayton's plan would likely bring in less than projected because Dayton based his analysis on the state's expected tax revenue in 2011. A more accurate benchmark are tax year 2006 numbers, which means Dayton's plan would bring in somewhere between $3.4 and $3.8 billion.
Tim Taylor, who edits the Journal of Economic Perspectives based at Macalester College, says Dayton's plan is reasonable. But he explained that increasing taxes on the wealthiest rarely brings in as much revenue as expected.
"Wealthy people have a lot of options," such as moving to another state when taxes get higher, Taylor said. "It's not that everyone does all these things. But enough people do some of them to make a difference."
The Verdict
Dayton's tax plan would bring the state billions more in revenue. But $4 billion may be wishful thinking. His claim is inconclusive.
Sources
Minnesota Public Radio News, Midmorning, July 20, 2010
The Minnesota Department of Revenue, 2009 Minnesota Tax Incidence Study, accessed May 12, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, Tom Scheck interview with Minnesota Department of
Revenue Tax Research Director Paul Wilson, accessed July 29, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, Fact check: Mark Dayton wants to tax the rich but how much?, by Tom Scheck, Dec. 8, 2009
Interview, Tim Taylor, Managing Editor of the Journal of Economic Perspectives, July 29, 2010
Interview, Brian Klaas, policy director, Mark Dayton, July 28, 2010
More
Posted at 3:47 PM on July 28, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(3 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
DFL House Speaker Margaret Anderson Kelliher's gubernatorial campaign is all about jobs.
Part of her plan to boost employment in Minnesota involves two $1 billion bonding bills that she says will result in a specific number of jobs over four years.
"Two $1 billion bonding bills...will have a 50,000 job effect," she told Minnesota Public Radio reporter Tom Scheck during a jobs press conference July 16, 2010.
Kelliher's estimates are reasonable, but deserve some clarification.
The Evidence
Bonding bills are essentially miniature stimulus packages. They're meant to fund state construction projects such as bridge and road repair. Kelliher said her proposed bonding bills would create 50,000 jobs or more during her tenure as governor.
Job creation estimates are fraught with uncertainty; they depend on many variables -- including the types of jobs created and how much those jobs will pay. Economists disagree on how useful government investment is in creating jobs. Nevertheless, Kelliher's analysis is based on sound data. Here's how the numbers break down:
โข $700 million will be invested in road, bridge and building construction and in making state buildings more energy efficient, creating or saving about 19,950 jobs. This figure is based on a metric developed by Stephen Fuller, the director of the Center for Regional Analysis at George Mason University who predicts that $1 billion on non-residential construction supports approximately 28,500 jobs.
โข $300 million will be invested in flood mitigation, conservation projects and asset preservation at the state's colleges and universities. Kelliher estimates the investment will create or save about 3,000 jobs. This figure is based on an estimate developed by state economist Tom Stinson who predicts that every $1 million invested in such projects results in 10 jobs.
By the end of her second year in office, the bonding effort could result in more than 45,000 jobs Kelliher spokesman Matt Swenson said.
Generally speaking, Kelliher's numbers pass muster. But both Stinson and Fuller point out that Kelliher should clarify that those jobs will be created or saved. The first bonding bill would create around 22,000 jobs. Some of those jobs likely would be temporary, others would last more than a year depending on the project. So the second bonding bill would maintain some jobs, rather than create new ones.
The Verdict
Kelliher's analysis is based on realistic assumptions, but she failed to point out that she's talking about 50,000 jobs created or saved in this particular claim. However, she presents a more nuanced argument on her website and Facebook page, so the claim is accurate.
Sources
Margaret for Governor, Leave No Stone Unturned: Margaret's Plan to Create Jobs and Get Minnesotans Back to Work, accessed July 28, 2010
Facebook, Margaret for Governor, accessed July 28, 2010
The St. Cloud Times, The Tale of Two Formulas, By Mark Sommerhauser, March 8, 2010
Minnesota AFL-CIO, letter to Rep. Alice Hausman, Feb. 15, 2010
Interview, Matt Swenson, spokesman, Margaret Anderson Kelliher, July 27, 2010
Interview, Stephen Fuller, Director, Center for Regional Analysis at George Mason University, July 28, 2010
Interview, Tom Stinson, Minnesota State Economist, July 28, 2010
More
Posted at 12:30 PM on July 23, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(4 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
Boosting Minnesota's green energy production will be good for Minnesota's environment and for its economy, says Matt Entenza, a DFL candidate for governor.
"Every wind turbine that we put up in Minnesota in our productive areas makes as much money as an oil well does in Texas," he told viewers of a June 1, 2010, virtual town hall.
In fact, when it comes to profitability, wind turbines and oil wells bring in a comparable amount of cash.
The Evidence
Dissecting Entenza's claim requires a bit of math.
Entenza's campaign makes the conservative estimate that each turbine operates at 25 percent capacity - or the average wind turbine produces about 3,285 megawatt hours annually. But experts in the Minnesota wind industry say that's a conservative estimate as most turbines in the state operate at between 30 and 40 percent capacity.
At about $79 for every megawatt hour of wind energy, that adds up to $260,500 annually.
How do oil wells compare?
Entenza isn't talking about the drilling behemoths off the coast of Texas. Rather, he's referring to small operations that produce less than 10 barrels a day - and make up 80 percent of the drilling in Texas.
Entenza's campaign predicts that, on average, these wells produce nine barrels a day and make $244,929 annually; according to the Energy Information Administration, these wells actually average about 7.3 barrels a year, driving down that sum to $198,665 annually.
So, Minnesota wind turbines make as much, if not more, than most oil wells in Texas.
The Verdict
No matter how you dice the numbers, wind turbines and oil wells are comparable when it comes to profitability.
Entenza's claim is accurate.
Sources
Matt Entenza for Governor, virtual town hall meeting, June 1, 2010
Texas Railroad Commission, Oil Production and Well Counts (1935-2009), accessed July 21, 2010
The Energy Information Administration, Texas 2003, Distribution of Wells by Production Rate Bracket, accessed July 21, 2010
The Department of Energy, Marginal & Stripper Well Revitalization, accessed July 21, 2010
National Wind, Minnesota Wind Facts, accessed July 21, 2010
The Energy Information Administration, Average Retail Price of Electricity to Ultimate Customers by End-Use Sector, by State, accessed July 22, 2010
Interview, Jeremy Drucker, spokesman, Matt Entenza, July 21, 2010
Interview, William Holmes, attorney, Stoel Rives, July 21, 2010
Interview, Ramona Nye, spokeswoman, Texas Railroad Commission, July 22, 2010
Interview, Joel Morrison, Director, Stripper Well Consortium, July 22, 2010
More
Note: From now until the August 10 primary PoliGraph will appear more frequently and focus on statements by the three Democrats competing for the DFL nomination.
Posted at 1:40 PM on July 21, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(10 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
Mark Dayton's latest TV ad takes aim at Gov. Tim Pawlenty's education funding record.
"Pawlenty cut funding by $1,300 a student," according to the DFL gubernatorial candidate's television spot.
Dayton gets his numbers right, but his claim should come with some caveats.
The Evidence
Minnesota public schools receive funding from a variety of sources, including state and local taxes, fees and federal dollars.
Dayton's claim focuses on state aid, and originated with research done by Jeff Van Wychen, a fellow with the think tank Minnesota 2020.
The numbers are straightforward: Adjusted for inflation, the state gave schools about $8 billion in 2003; in fiscal year 2011, schools will get $6.9 billion. Using attendance figures from the Minnesota Department of Education, inflation adjusted per-student funding has dropped by about $1,300 from $9,700 in 2003 to about $8,400 in 2011.
But experts say it's important to view these figures in context.
Most agree that accounting for inflation is fair when looking at the state's long-term education spending because it helps determine schools' purchasing power. But they pointed out that Dayton does not make it clear that he's talking inflation-adjusted numbers.
In fact, the hard numbers show that if you take out inflation, state aid for schools has been on a slight upward trend under Pawlenty's administration.
According to Minnesota Management and Budget, in nominal dollars schools received about $6 billion in state aid in fiscal year 2003. Since then, the number has slowly risen to the current figure of $6.9 billion.
The Verdict
On one hand, Dayton's claim is correct: Factoring in inflation, per-student state aid has dropped by about $1,300. What that figure demonstrates is that schools are getting less for every dollar they spend on students today than they did in 2003.
What Dayton's ad fails to point out is that, in nominal dollars, education funding has increased slightly, though perhaps not dramatically enough to keep up with cost of educating Minnesotans. So, to say that Pawlenty cut funding is misleading. In fact, Pawlenty has frequently protected K-12 education dollars in his budget, as he did in his most recent proposal.
As a result, Dayton's claim is inconclusive.
Sources
MarkDayton.org, "Forged" TV ad, accessed July 19, 2010
Minnesota 2020, Minnesota's School Investment Keeps Falling, by Jeff Van Wychen, accessed July 19, 2010
Minnesota 2020, Taking the Spin out of Inflation Estimates, by Jeff Van Wychen, accessed July 19, 2010
Minnesota Management and Budget, May 2010 End of Legislative Session Price of Government, accessed July 19, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, Pawlenty uses stimulus money to reverse budget cuts, by Tim Pugmire, March 17, 2009
Minnesota Public Radio News, Pawlenty's budget: K-12 spared, higher ed sees cuts, by Tom Weber, Feb. 15, 2010
Interview, Brian Klass, policy director, Mark Dayton, July 19, 2010
Interview, Jeff Van Wychen, fellow, Minnesota 2020, July 19, 2010
Interview, Aaron Twait, Research Director, Minnesota Taxpayers Association, July 19, 2010
Interview Jim Horney, Director of Federal Fiscal Policy at the Center on Budget and Policy Priorities, July 19, 2010
Interview, Tim Strom, Legislative Analyst, Minnesota House of Representatives, July 19, 2010
Interview, Jay Kiedrowski, Senior Fellow, the Hubert H. Humphrey Institute of Public Affairs, July 19, 2010
Interview, Curt Yoakum, spokesman, Minnesota Management and Budget, July 20, 2010
Interview, Scott Croonquist, Executive Director, Association of Metropolitan School Districts, July 21, 2010
More
Posted at 11:43 AM on July 14, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(3 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: U.S. House, PoliGraph
Rep. Michele Bachmann has criticized President Barack Obama for the way he's handled the massive oil spill in the Gulf of Mexico.
Recently, she pointed out that BP's Deepwater Horizon drilling project was actually approved by Obama's administration.
"Remember, this was under Obama's Minerals and Management Service bureau with his appointed chief of MMS who actually issued the permits and wrote all the approvals for exactly what BP did," she told WCCO reporter Pat Kessler in a June 16, 2010, interview. "This happened under President Obama's watch."
Bachmann is correct: The Obama administration gave BP the green light to start drilling.
The Evidence
The story of the Deepwater Horizon spill starts in 2008, when the Bush administration leased new drilling tracts in the Gulf of Mexico to several oil companies, including BP.
The following year, BP submitted an exploration plan to the Minerals Management Service (MMS), the arm of the Interior Department that oversees drilling. It stated that the company could, in the event of an oil spill, "respond, to the maximum extent practicable, to a worst-case discharge, or a substantial threat of such a discharge."
MMS then had 30 days to review the plan. During this time, MMS could have asked BP to do an extensive environmental impact review - it's technically required for some drilling projects - but the department gave BP a waiver instead.
In fact, such exemptions are common; according to an Interior Department spokesman speaking with the Washington Post, MMS issues between 250 and 400 annually for projects in the Gulf.
On April 6, 2009, MMS approved the plan.
The Verdict
The leasing process may have started under the previous administration, but it was Obama's officials who give the project a stamp of approval.
Bachmann's claim is accurate.
Sources
WCCO, interview with Rep. Michele Bachmann, June 16, 2010
The Minerals Management Service, Central Gulf of Mexico Sale 206 Nets $ 3.67 Billion in High Bids, August 4, 2008
BP, Initial Exploration Plan Mississippi Canyon Block 252, accessed June 30, 2010
The White House, Remarks by the President on the Gulf Oil Spill, May 27, 2010
The Washington Post, U.S. exempted BP's Gulf of Mexico drilling from environmental impact study, by Juliet Eilperin, May 5, 2010
The Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act, accessed June 30, 2010
The Department of the Interior, Salazar Launches Safety and Environmental Protection Reforms to Toughen Oversight of Offshore Oil and Gas Operations, May 11, 2010
Interview, Richard Charter, Senior Policy Advisor, Defenders of Wildlife, June 30, 2010
Interview, Rachel Horn, spokeswoman, Rep. Michele Bachmann, June 30, 2010
Interview, Kendra Barkoff, spokeswoman, the Department of the Interior, June 30, 2010
More
Note
Next week PoliGraph will start to appear more frequently and will focus on the DFL candidates for governor as the August 10 primary election approaches.
Posted at 11:30 AM on July 7, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(3 Comments)
Filed under: PoliGraph, Tim Pawlenty
During his recent travels around the country, Gov. Tim Pawlenty made a pit-stop in Tennessee to speak at the Republican Party's annual dinner.
In his June 25, speech, Pawlenty touted his efforts to reform "that entitlement perspective in Minnesota."
In Minnesota, he said, "the longest transit strike in the history of the United States of America shut down the bus system for 44 days because our bus drivers thought it was okay to work for just 15 years and then have the government pay for their health insurance for the rest of your life."
A quick Google search shows that the 2004 Metro Bus strike is hardly the longest in U.S. history.
The Evidence
Pawlenty cites this bit of Minnesota history often, according to Alex Conant, a spokesman for Pawlenty. In an e-mail, Conant wrote, "it turns out it was only the longest in the modern history, and there have been some that were longer."
Indeed, here are a few transit strikes that beat the 2004 Metro Bus shut-down:
โข In 1983, workers for the Southeastern Pennsylvania Transportation Authority staged a 108-day strike.
โข In 1967, Honolulu bus drivers stopped working for 68 days in an effort to get better pay.
โข In 1958, Los Angeles bus drivers launched a strike that lasted 54 days.
The Verdict
Pawlenty's characterization of the 2004 Metro Bus strike is off by a long-shot. This claim is false.
Sources
Trains Magazine, Southeastern Pennsylvania Transportation Authority (SEPTA), by Matt Van Hattem, June 30, 2006
The Honolulu Star Bulletin, Longest stoppage halted buses for 68 days
The Los Angeles Times, Buses Put in Shape to Roll Again Today After End of Long Strike, accessed June 30, 2010.
Interview, Alex Conant, spokesman, Gov. Tim Pawlenty, July 1, 2010
More
About PoliGraph
Posted at 10:56 AM on June 30, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(3 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: U.S. House, PoliGraph
State Sen. Tarryl Clark, DFL-St. Cloud, says incumbent Congresswoman Michele Bachmann is spending too much time traveling the nation, and should stick closer to home because her district's economy is suffering.
"We have the highest unemployment, highest foreclosure rate in the state," Clark said on the June 21, 2010, episode of Hardball with Chris Matthews. "All the while she's seeking celebrity status, and off following her own agenda instead of fighting for people of the sixth district."
It's become one of Clark's key talking points against Bachmann, and she repeats it often.
While Clark correctly points out that the 6th District has the highest foreclosure rate in the state, her claim that it also has the highest unemployment rate is wrong.
The Evidence
Calculating foreclosure and unemployment rates by congressional district is tricky because district borders do not always fall on county lines, and Minnesota determines the rates by county. The 6th District includes Benton, Sherburne, and Wright counties, half of Stearns County and most of Anoka and Washington counties.
Including all of Stearns County, the 6th District has a foreclosure rate of 1.76 percent, according to HousingLink, a Minneapolis-based organization that regularly crunches the state's foreclosure numbers.
The district's actual foreclosure rate likely is somewhat less given that half of Stearns County is in the 7th District. Nevertheless, by this measure, Bachmann's territory comes out on top.
At most, the 6th District's unemployment rate is 6.76 percent. That's far less than the 8.25 percent average unemployment rate for the 8th congressional district. In fact, since Clark declared her intention to run against Bachmann in July of 2009, the 6th District has never had the highest unemployment rate in the state.
Clark is actually referring to Workforce Service Area 5, one of 18 workforce training areas designated by the state, said Clark spokeswoman Carrie Lucking. But there's a problem with that explanation: Only two of the 11 counties in this area are in the 6th District, so most of the territory is out of Bachmann's control.
The Verdict
Clark's claim that Bachmann's territory has the highest foreclosure rate in the state is correct.
However, her claim that Bachmann's district has the highest unemployment rate is wrong. Even if Clark is referring to Workforce Service Area 5, it only contains two of the 6th District's counties, so that's not a fair comparison.
As a result of PoliGraph's analysis, Clark's campaign will begin saying that the 6th District has some of the highest employment rates in the state, Lucking said.
SOURCES:
Minnesota Public Radio News, Clark sets full attention on unseating Bachmann, by Mark Zdechlik, June 9, 2010
Hardball with Chris Matthews, June 21, 2010
Minnesota Department of Employment and Economic Development, unemployment rates for counties in the 6th Congressional district, accessed June 23, 2010
Minnesota Department of Employment and Economic Development, unemployment rates for counties in the 8th Congressional district, accessed June 23, 2010
HousingLink.org, Foreclosures in Minnesota: A Report Based on County Sheriff's Sale Data, Feb. 2010, accessed June 23, 2010
Minnesota Independent, Bachmann's district continues to lead state in foreclosures, By Andy Birkey, Dec. 1, 2009
Minnesota Department of Employment and Economic Development, profile of Work Service Area 5, accessed June 23, 2010
Interview, Carrie Lucking, spokeswoman for Tarryl Clark, June 23, 2010
Posted at 11:00 AM on June 23, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(1 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
Rob Hahn's plan to lower the deficit involves six new riverboat casinos on the Mississippi.
"The revenue to the state, cities and counties would be approximately $400 to $600 million annually," the Independence Party gubernatorial candidate said during a June 17 press conference.
Hahn's estimate isn't unreasonable, but it's on the high end.
The Evidence
Hahn's estimate is derived from Illinois, Iowa and Indiana gambling data, states that permit riverboat casinos. He concludes Minnesota could make an average of $428 million in new tax revenue annually.
A February 2010 report done by the Minnesota House of Representatives puts Hahn's claim in perspective. For instance, based on Illinois gambling data, the state could bring in as much as $135 million yearly if it allowed slot machines in bars.
Riverboat casinos would have more than just slot machines, so they would likely bring in more cash. But probably not as much as Hahn predicts, said Don Feeney, the Minnesota State Lottery's research and planning director. "It's not out of the question, but it's probably on the high side," said Feeney. "There are so many 'it depends' involved."
For example, a lot will depend on what type of games the casinos offer, and how many new customers they draw, Feeney said.
Furthermore, gambling in Illinois, Iowa and Indiana is different from gambling in Minnesota. Three riverboats right outside Chicago attract a lot of urban gamblers, for instance, inflating Illinois' revenue, Feeney said. And in Indiana and Iowa, riverboats get a lot of business from out of state. In Minnesota, there's no comparable place to put a boat that would draw that many gamblers across state lines, Feeney added.
The Verdict
Hahn's estimate isn't factually wrong, but it's high. Much will depend on where the boats are located, what kind of games they offer, and how many new customers they attract.
Hahn's claim rates an inconclusive.
SOURCES
Minnesota House of Representatives, House Research Bill Summary of H.F. 646, accessed June 18, 2010
The American Gaming Association, 2010 State of the States: The AGA Survey of Casino Entertainment, accessed June 18, 2010
Minnesota House of Representatives Research Department, Estimates from Gambling Expansion, Feb. 18, 2010
Rob Hahn for Governor, Riverboat Gambling Analysis, June 18, 2010
Interview, Rob Hahn, Independence Party candidate for governor, June 18, 2010
Interview, Don Feeney, Research and Planning Director, Minnesota State Lottery, June 21, 2010
Interview, Tom Barrett, Executive Director of the Gaming Control Board, June 18, 2010
More
The Humphrey Institute
Posted at 11:31 AM on June 16, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(3 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, PoliGraph
State Rep. Dan Severson, R-Sauk Rapids, says that if he's elected Secretary of State, he'll do a better job of making sure military personnel overseas have their say in local elections.
During the 2008 elections, "military ballots were 16 times more likely to be rejected by local officials than other absentee ballots," Severson wrote on his Web site. Severson repeated the claim at a press conference on June 7 at the State Office Building.
Absentee ballots played a pivotal role in determining the outcome of the Senate election recount.
But Severson's claim is based on data that have since been corrected by the Heritage Foundation, a Washington, D.C., think tank and the original source of this claim. In fact, the rejection rate for military ballots was quite a bit lower. Although the correct information is easily found by reading the revised report, the data remain incorrect on Severson's web site.
The Evidence
The data Severson cited was published in October of 2009 by the Center for the American Experiment, which got its data from an analysis published by the Heritage Foundation in July of 2009. The Center for the American Experiment did not list its sources.
But according to Hans von Spakovsky and Eric Eversole, authors of the Heritage Foundation report, they initially misread some important numbers and determined that military absentee ballots were 16 times more likely to be rejected than regular absentee ballots.
In March, they corrected their report and posted the accurate information on their web site.
"If the military voter in Minnesota cast his or her absentee ballot, that ballot was nearly two times more likely to be rejected by local election officials, as compared to other absentee voters statewide," the Heritage Foundation report now reads.
The Verdict
Severson's claim came from two reports that had the numbers wrong. In fact, military absentee ballots were two times more likely to be rejected than compared to regular absentee ballots - far less than Severson stated.
It's a false for Severson's claim.
Sources
Dan Severson for Secretary of State, accessed June 9, 2010
The Heritage Foundation, America's Military Voters: Re-enfranchising the
Disenfranchised, by Hans von Spakovsky and M. Eric Eversole, July 28, 2009. Updated March, 2010.
The Center for the American Experiment, No Longer a National Model: Fifteen Recommendations for Fixing Minnesota Election Law and Practice, by Kent Kaiser, October, 2009
Citizens for Election Integrity Minnesota, Minnesota's Elections -- Transparent, Verifiable, and Accurate, Feb. 25, 2010
Moritz Law School, Findings of Fact, Conclusions of Law, and Order for Judgment, accessed June 10, 2010
Minnesota Blue Book 2009-2010, Chapter 10: Minnesota Votes, accessed June 10, 2010
Interview, Dan Severson, June 10, 2010
Interview M. Eric Eversole, author of America's Military Voters: Re-enfranchising the Disenfranchised, June 10, 2010
Interview, Kent Kaiser, author of No Longer a National Model: Fifteen Recommendations for Fixing Minnesota Election Law and Practice, June 10, 2010
Interview, Kathy Bonnifield, Associate Director, Citizens for Election Integrity-Minnesota, June 10, 2010
More
About PoliGraph
Posted at 11:30 AM on June 9, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(1 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
House Speaker Margaret Anderson Kelliher, the DFL-endorsed candidate for governor, says the state should move early to shift thousands of low-income residents from two state programs into Medical Assistance, Minnesota's Medicaid program.
It's a good idea because it will bring money back to the state, she said in a May 25, 2010, press conference.
"For every dollar we put in, $7.50 [will come] back to the state," Kelliher said.
Kelliher's statement falls into a grey area. Minnesota will be getting a lot of federal money, but her statement is misleading because it implies an impressive return on investment.
The Evidence
Kelliher wants to shift people who get health insurance from two state programs--General Assistance Medical Care (GAMC) and MinnesotaCare--into Medical Assistance (MA).
The state and federal governments split the cost of MA. The other two programs don't get any federal funding.
The new federal health care law expands Medicaid coverage to low-income people who don't have insurance now--the same kind of people the state now pays to cover under GAMC and MinnesotaCare - and requires the federal government to match state spending.
For Minnesota, this means shifting patients from GAMC and MinnesotaCare into MA, effectively dissolving most of the two programs that would otherwise cost the state about $1.2 billion over the next three years.
The shift also translates into $1.4 billion in federal dollars. Because the state will have to match federal Medicaid money it will still have to spend the $1.2 billion, plus another $188 million.
The reason the cost goes from $1.2 billion to a combined state and federal total of $2.8 billion is because MA would cover many more people than the two state programs do now and provide enhanced benefits. Under the new federal law all states will have to expand Medicaid in 2014.
The Verdict
On one hand, the plan sounds like a good deal for Minnesota. Kelliher is correct that for every new dollar the state invests in MA, $7.50 in federal funding will come back to Minnesota.
But Kelliher's statement glosses over the important point that the state will spend $188 million in addition to the $1.2 billion it would otherwise spend on GAMC and MinnesotaCare. All told, the state will have to expend the same amount as the federal government.
As a result, Kelliher's claim is inconclusive.
Sources
Minnesota Public Radio News, Kelliher on the MA opt-in, May 25, 2010
Minnesota Public Radio News, Federal health law becoming an issue in governor's race, by Tom Scheck, May 25, 2010
Minnesota Department of Human Services, Medical Assistance, accessed June 3, 2010
The Kaiser Family Foundation, Medicaid Coverage and Spending in Health Reform, by John Holahan and Irene Headen, May 2010
The Kaiser Family Foundation, Financing New Medicaid Coverage Under Health Reform: The Role of the Federal Government and States, May 2010
The Minnesota State Legislature, health care budget details, accessed June 5, 2010
E-mail Interview, Matt Swenson, Spokesman, Margaret Anderson Kelliher, June 3, 2010
E-mail Interview, Karen Smigielski, Communications Manager, Minnesota Department of Human Services, June 4, 2010
Phone Interview, Stephen Parente, Professor, Carlson School of Management, June 3, 2010
Phone Interview, Martha Heberlein, Research Analyst, Georgetown University Center for Children and Families, June 4, 2010
Phone Interview, Lynn Blewett, Director, University of Minnesota's State Health Access Data Assistance Center, June 4, 2010
More
About PoliGraph
Posted at 11:00 AM on June 2, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(1 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
Gov. Tim Pawlenty and members of the state Legislature balanced the budget for this biennium, but left a problem in the next fiscal cycle.
Tom Horner says the problem will be enormous.
"Instead of facing up to the hard choices, legislators have created a budget deficit that will be as much as $9 billion in the first year of the new governor's term," said the Independence Party gubernatorial candidate during a May 21, 2010, speech.
In fact, the budget deficit is far less than that. Horner has double-counted payments to schools that the Legislature has deferred until the next budget cycle, and exaggerated the size of deficit.
The Evidence
The most recent projected budget deficit for the next biennium is about $5.8 billion, a big problem to be sure, but far less than Horner claimed.
Horner is counting $1.2 billion in inflation, a factor not included in the official deficit estimate, according to Marti Jones, Horner's spokeswoman. That brings Horner's calculation to about $7 billion.
The additional $2 billion reflects money the government owes schools, which the state has postponed paying until the next budget cycle, Jones wrote in an e-mail.
That would bring the budget deficit to $9 billion. But here's the catch: Minnesota Management and Budget has already included the deferral, which totals about $1.2 billion, in its deficit projection.
The Verdict
Horner is double-counting what the state owes schools. Minnesota is facing a big budget problem in the next biennium, but Horner's estimate is off by at least $1.2 billion.
As a result, Horner fails his first PoliGraph test.
Sources
Minnesota Public Radio News, Horner speech, May 21, 2010
Minnesota State Legislature, 2010 Legislative Session, First Special Session: Summary of General Fund Budget Conditions, accessed May 26, 2010
Minnesota Management and Budget, February 2010 Forecast, accessed May 26, 2010
The Grand Forks Herald, Payback time arrives for some Minnesota schools, Associated Press, May 26, 2010
The Minnesota Budget Project, Governor's budget spares K-12, but cost shifts remain, accessed May 26, 2010
E-mail interview, Marti Jones, spokeswoman, Tom Horner, May 25, 2010
E-mail interview, Christina Wessel, deputy director, Minnesota Budget Project, May 26, 2010
E-mail interview, Mark Haveman, executive director, Minnesota Taxpayers Association, May 27, 2010
E-mail interview, Dane Smith, president, Growth & Justice, May 27, 2010
Phone interview, Curt Yoakum, spokesman, Minnesota Management and Budget, May 26, 2010
Phone interview, Lonnie Hartley, spokesman, Education Minnesota, May 26, 2010
Phone interview, Jeff Van Wychen, tax policy fellow, Minnesota 2020, May 26, 2010
More
Posted at 11:30 AM on May 26, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(10 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, PoliGraph, Tim Pawlenty
Gov. Tim Pawlenty recently appeared on Minnesota Public Radio News' Midday program, where he highlighted his efforts to reduce government spending.
He told host Gary Eichten that, "From 1960 until 2002, the average two-year spending increase for the state in the general fund was 21 percent. We brought that down during my time to about 2 percent a year."
But more can be done, he said.
"The state is paying half or more of the budgets of prosperous large cities all over the state," he said during the May 18 interview. "In aids and credits, the state pays over half of the budget of the city of St. Paul. It makes very little sense."
This PoliGraph result is mixed. Pawlenty is correct that he's reduced government spending compared to his predecessors. But city documents contradict Pawlenty's second claim; St. Paul receives far less cash from the state than Pawlenty stated.
Claim One: The Evidence
Pawlenty took office in 2003. Between 1960 and 2003, the average two-year spending increase from the general fund - the state's primary account- was about 21 percent, according to a document prepared by Minnesota Management and Budget.
Pawlenty is correct that, under his administration, annual spending has increased at an average 2 percent a year. His average is low due to significant spending cuts in the 2010-2011 budget. But it's important to note that Pawlenty is comparing a two-year average with one-year averages.
For instance, the annual average spending increase under past administrations was about 10 percent - much lower than the two-year average. And Pawlenty's two-year average spending increase over his 7 and a half years in office is 3.9 percent, not the 2 percent he touted in the interview.
Claim One: The Verdict
Pawlenty inflated the difference between his spending record and that of his predecessors' by contrasting his very low one-year average with a very high two-year average. Nevertheless, he got his numbers right and his underlying point, that he's made big cuts in the growth of government spending, is correct.
As a result, Pawlenty's claim is accurate.
Note: One thing to note is that a large part of Gov. Pawlenty's budget balancing plan in 2010 relied on an accounting shift and did not technicall cut spending. Pawlenty and the Legislature delayed $1.9 billion in payments to schools to help balance the state's budget. It looks like a cut on the balance sheet but the law requires the payments to schools to be made after the two year budget is over. In other words, Pawlenty balanced the budget but the next governor and Legislature have to either come up with the funds to fix the payment shift or agree to continued delays. - Tom Scheck
Claim Two: The Evidence
Pawlenty missed the mark on his second claim about St. Paul's budget.
The city's most significant source of state funding is Local Government Aid, money given based on tax base and estimated spending. It's been on the decline since Pawlenty took office.
St. Paul's 2010 budget of $642 million includes about $52 million from LGA. All of the city's intergovernmental revenue totals only 19.3 percent of its current budget - far less than half as Pawlenty claimed. Previous budgets are similar. For instance, the city's 2009 budget of $600 million includes about $57 million in LGA funding.
Pawlenty misspoke, said Brian McClung, Pawlenty's deputy chief of staff. He said Pawlenty meant to refer to the year he took office, when LGA funding nearly matched St. Paul's tax levy of $64 million.
Claim Two: The Verdict
Pawlenty said that the state is funding more than half of St. Paul's budget. But the numbers show he's wrong: St. Paul receives far less than that from the state. Even if Pawlenty meant to compare LGA funds with city taxes rather than overall budget, he was referencing old figures.
Pawlenty's second claim does not pass the PoliGraph test.
SOURCES:
Minnesota Public Radio News, Midday, May 18, 2010
Gov. Tim Pawlenty's website, Minnesota Historical Expenditures: General Fund, accessed May 20, 2010
City of St. Paul, 2010 Adopted Budget, accessed May 20, 2010
City of St. Paul, 2009 Adopted Budget, accessed May 21, 2010
City of St. Paul, 2008 Adopted Budget, accessed May 21, 2010
City of St. Paul, 2007 Adopted Budget, accessed May 21, 2010
City of St. Paul, 2006 Adopted Budget, accessed May 21, 2010
MinnPost.com, Ten Things You May Not Know About St. Paul's City Budget, by Matt Smith, Dec. 11, 2007
E-mail correspondence, Brian McClung, Deputy Chief of Staff for Gov. Tim Pawlenty, May 21, 2010
E-mail correspondence with Bob Hume, Deputy Chief of Staff for St. Paul Mayor Chris Coleman, May 20, 2010
More
About PoliGraph
Posted at 11:30 AM on May 19, 2010
by Catharine Richert
(9 Comments)
Filed under: Campaign 2010, Campaign 2010: Minnesota Governor, PoliGraph
"Tax the rich" is the mantra of Mark Dayton's campaign.
The former U.S. Senator promises to increase taxes on the wealthiest Minnesotans if elected governor. To sell his plan, Dayton needs to convince voters that the richest aren't paying enough.
Here's a claim from his Web site:
"Minnesota's wealthiest citizens pay only two-thirds of their fair share of state and local taxes."
Dayton's claim is more or less correct; in terms of percentage of income, the richest Minnesotans pay less in taxes than most.
The Evidence
Dayton's campaign pointed to a 2009 study by the Minnesota Department of Revenue on how much residents pay in state and local taxes.
According to the report's 2011 projections, the top 1 percent of earners in the state - those making more than $480,000 a year - give between 7.7 and 8.8 percent of their income to the state. That's compared to an average 12.5 percent paid by the bottom 90 percent of households, or those making less than $136,954 annually.
After that, the math is simple: divide the average percent of income paid by the wealthiest by the average paid by everyone else, and it's exactly two-thirds.
The Dayton campaign compares the top 1 percent with the bottom 90 percent, which leaves out a swath of taxpayers, said Paul Wilson, Director of Tax Research for the revenue department.
Comparing the top 10 percent - those making more than $136,955 -- with the bottom 90 percent would show that the wealthiest pay an average of three-fourths of what most pay.
Brian Klaas, Dayton's policy director, said that their comparison aims to show how the very richest fare under Minnesota's tax structure. Indeed, social scientists say that such a comparison is commonly used to measure income inequality.
The Verdict
Wilson agrees with Dayton's overall analysis.
"Wealthiest is in the eye of the beholder," he said. "The basic message of the statement is correct."
As a result, Dayton's passes his first PoliGraph test.
Sources:
Markdayton.org, Taxes, accessed May 12, 2010
The Minnesota Department of Revenue, 2009 Minnesota Tax Incidence Study, accessed May 12, 2010
MPR News, Fee - 'it's not a tax' - could hit smokers, by Laura McCallum, May 20, 2005
Phone interview with Paul Wilson, Director of Tax Research, Minnesota Department of Revenue, May 11, 2010
E-mail interview with Gregory Joseph, Communications Direct for Mark Dayton for a Better Minnesota, April 29, 2010
Phone interview with Brian Klaas, Policy Director for Mark Dayton for a Better Minnesota, May 10, 2010
Phone interview with Tim Taylor, Managing Editor of the Journal of Economic Perspectives, May 13, 2010
Phone interview with Lane Kenworthy, Professor of Sociology and Political Science at the University of Arizona, May 13, 2010
More
About PoliGraph
| December 2011 | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| S | M | T | W | T | F | S |
| 1 | 2 | 3 | ||||
| 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 |
| 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | 17 |
| 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 |
| 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 |